PRS-778 X Instruction Manual en Overseas General X 2.04 20200814

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 275

PRS-778

TransformerProtection
Instruction Manual

CYG SUNRI CO., LTD.


Preface

Preface

User’s Guideline
This instruction manual contains full information of the equipment, including function descriptions,
logic diagrams, inputsignals, output signals, setting parameters andtechnical parameters. It also
list the operations on safe handling, commissioning and maintaining of this equipment. The
instruction manual can be can be used as a technical reference during the whole product life
cycle.

Documentationand manufactured equipments purchased fromCYG SUNRI CO., LTD.are


dispatched separately due to the necessary manufacturing period.Therefor, they sometimes may
not reach the recipients at the same time. Therefore this manual is provided as a technical
reference to commission the equipment.

The installation and commissioning personnel should read all relevant chapters carefullyand get a
thorough knowledge of the contents of this manual, before conducting any operation to the
equipment. In this way, the personnel cangetthe required knowledge in handling electronic
equipment.

This manual contains a security chapter whichdescribes the safety precautions recommended
when using the equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter is
recommended to be thoroughly read and understood.

Personnel Security
The content in this chapter specifically describes to prevent and reduce the safety accidents in
electric power production and construction processures, to ensure the personal safety and health
of employees in production activities and to ensure the power grids stable operation and reliable
power supply.

Any kind of direcily touching with the metal parts of the electrical equipment should be avoided
when electrical equipment is on operation, because of thepotential electric shock risk. Neglecting
warning notices should be prevent because the improperly operation may damage the device,
even cause personnel injury.

The good operating condition of the equipment depends on proper shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation, commissioning and maintenance. Therefore, only qualified personnel should
be allowedto operate the equipment.Intended personnel are individuals who:

 Have a thorough knowledge of protection systems, protection equipment, protection functions


and the configured functional logic in theIEDs;

 Have a basic knowledgein the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment;

 Are familiar with the working field where it is being installed;

 Are able to safely perform operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering steps;

PRS-778 i
Preface

 Are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment, and to isolate, ground, and label it;

 Are trained in the maintanence and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety
engineering regulations;

 Have been trained in first aid if any emergency situations happen.

Warning Indications
The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

DANGER! means that death, severe personal injury and considerable equipment damage
will occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

WARNING! means that death, severe personal and considerable equipment damage
could occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION! means that light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded.

NOTICE!is particularly applies to damage to device and to resulting damage of the protected
equipment.

DANGER!

NEVER allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will
produce a dangerously high voltage.

WARNING!

ONLY qualified personnel should work on or in the vicinity of this device. This personnel
MUST be familiar with all safety regulations and service procedures described in this
manual. During operating of electrical device, certain part of the device is under high
voltage. Severe personal injury and significant device damage could result from
improper behavior.

WARNING!

Do NOT touch the exposed terminals of this device while the power supply is on. The
generated high voltage causes death, injury, and device damage.

WARNING!

Thirty seconds is NECESSARY for discharging the voltage. Hazardous voltage can be

ii PRS-778
Preface

present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply.

CAUTION!

 Earthing

Securely earthed the earthing terminal of the device.

 Operating environment

ONLY use the device within the range of ambient environment and in an
environment free of abnormal vibration.

 Ratings

Check the input ratings BEFORE applying AC voltage/current and power supply to
the device.

 Printed circuit board

Do NOT attach or remove printed circuit board if the device is powered on.

 External circuit

Check the supply voltage used when connecting the device output contacts to
external circuits, in order to prevent overheating.

 Connection cable

Carefully handle connection cables without applying excessive force.

NOTICE!

The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing


features, please MAKE SURE that the version of this manual is compatible with the
product in your hand.

Copyright © 2017 CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. All rights reserved.

This document contains confidential information of CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. Any improper use of the document or information contained
herein in any way (including, but not limited to, total or partial disclosure, reproduction, or dissemination) by organizations or persons is
prohibited. CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. reserve all rights to this document and to the information contained herein.

CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. has made every effort to ensure that this document is accurate. CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. disclaims liability for any

PRS-778 iii
Preface

inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred. If nevertheless any incorrect, misleading, or incomplete information are found,
comments and suggestions for correction or improvement are greatly appreciated. CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. reserves the rights to upgrade
the products and to make improvements to the documents without notice.

The users are responsible for understanding the information and should not rely on this information as absolute. If the users do act upon
the suggestions contained in this document, the users should be responsible for themself and their actions.

CYG SUNRI CO., LTD.


Tel: +86-400-678-8099
Headquarters: No.13, Keji North 1st Road, North Area of Hi-tech
Website: http://www.sznari.com
Industral Park, Nanshan District, Shenzhen, China

P/N: ZL_PRS-778_X_Instruction Manual_EN_Overseas General_X Version: 2.04

Documentation Outline
The manual provides a functional and technical description of this relay and a comprehensive set
of instructions for the relay’s use and application.

All contents provided by this manual are summarized as below:

1 Briefly Introduction
Briefly introduce the application scope, the selectable functions and product features about this
equipment.

2 Technical Specifications
Introduce the technical specifications about this relay, including electrical specifications,
mechanical specifications, ambient temperature and humidity range, communication interface
parameters, type tests, setting ranges and accuracy limits etc.

3 Protection Functions
Provide a comprehensive and detailed protection function description of all protection modules.

4 Supervision Functions
Introduce the automatic self-supervision function of this equipment.

5 Monitoring&Control
Introduce the measurement, controlling, signaling, recording and other functions of this relay.

6 Hardware
Introduce the main module functions of this relay and describe the definition of all terminals of
each module.

7HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE


Include all the menus of device.

8 Configuration Function
Introduce the configurable function (such as protection function configuration, LED configuration,
binary input configuration and binary output configuration, analog quantities channels etc.) of this
relay.

iv PRS-778
Preface

9 Communication Protocol
Introduce the communication interfaces and protocol that this relay contains. IEC60970-5-103 and
IEC61850 protocols are introduced in details.

10Commissioning
Introduce how to commission this relay, check the calibration and test all the function of this relay.

11 Installation
Recommend on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of this relay. A guide to the
mechanical installation and electrical wiring of this relay is also provided, including earthing
recommendations. Some typical wiring connection is demonstrated in this manual manual as well.

12 Maintenance
A general maintenance steps for this device is outlined.

13 Decommissioning and Disposal


A general decommissioning and disposal steps for this relay is outlined.

14 Manual Version History


List the instruction manual versions and their corresponding modification history records.

PRS-778 v
Table of contents

Table of contents

Preface.................................................................................................................... i
User’s Guideline....................................................................................................................... i
Personnel Security.................................................................................................................. i
Warning Indications............................................................................................................... ii
Documentation Outline........................................................................................................ iv

Table of contents................................................................................................ 1
1 Briefly Introduction.......................................................................................11
1.1 Application Scope.......................................................................................................... 11
1.2 Product Function............................................................................................................11
1.3 Product Features............................................................................................................12

2 Technical Specifications............................................................................. 15
2.1 Electrical Specifications...............................................................................................15
2.1.1 Current Transformer Ratings.......................................................................................................... 15

2.1.2 Voltage Transformer Ratings.......................................................................................................... 15

2.1.3 Auxiliary Power Supply.................................................................................................................... 15

2.1.4 Binary Input........................................................................................................................................15

2.1.5 Binary Output.....................................................................................................................................16

2.2 Mechanical Specifications...........................................................................................16


2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range............................................................ 17
2.4 Communication Interfaces.......................................................................................... 17
2.4.1 Ethernet Port..................................................................................................................................... 17

2.4.2 Serial Port.......................................................................................................................................... 17

2.4.3 Time Synchronization.......................................................................................................................18

2.4.4 Ethernet Port for Debugging........................................................................................................... 18

2.5 Type Tests........................................................................................................................ 18


2.5.1 Environmental Tests......................................................................................................................... 18

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests.............................................................................................................................. 19

PRS-778 1
Table of contents

2.5.3 Electrical Tests.................................................................................................................................. 19

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility........................................................................................................ 19

2.6 Terminals.......................................................................................................................... 21
2.7 Measurement Range and Accuracy.......................................................................... 21
2.8 ProtectionFunction Features...................................................................................... 21
2.8.1 Transformer differential protection................................................................................................. 21

2.8.2 Impedance Protection...................................................................................................................... 21

2.8.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection................................................................................................ 22

2.8.4 Thermal Overload Protection..........................................................................................................22

2.8.5 Directional Earth Fault Protection.................................................................................................. 22

2.8.6 Restricted Earth Fault Protection................................................................................................... 22

2.8.7 Non-directional Instantaneous Earth Fault Protection............................................................... 22

2.8.8 Residual Overvoltage Protection................................................................................................... 22

2.8.9 Overvoltage protection.....................................................................................................................22

2.8.10 Undervoltage Protection................................................................................................................23

2.8.11 Overexcitation Protection.............................................................................................................. 23

2.8.12 Overfrequency protection..............................................................................................................23

2.8.13 Underfrequency protection........................................................................................................... 23

2.8.14 Rate-of-change frequency protection......................................................................................... 23

3 Protection Functions................................................................................... 25
3.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................25
3.1.1 System Setting.................................................................................................................................. 27

3.2 Transformer Differential Protection (87T)................................................................28


3.2.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 28

3.2.2 Protection Principle.......................................................................................................................... 31

3.2.3 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................... 41

3.2.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................42

3.3 Distance Protection 21..................................................................................................43


3.3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 43

3.3.2 Parameters........................................................................................................................................ 44

2 PRS-778
Table of contents

3.3.3 Fault Detector FD............................................................................................................................. 45

3.3.4 Mho Distance Protection 21M........................................................................................................ 48

3.3.5 Quadrilateral Distance Protection 21Q......................................................................................... 54

3.3.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing PSBR...................................................................................... 59

3.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67P/50/51)..................................................... 61


3.4.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 61

3.4.2 Protection Principle.......................................................................................................................... 65

3.4.3 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................... 69

3.4.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................69

3.5 Thermal Overload Protection (49)..............................................................................75


3.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 75

3.5.2 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................... 76

3.5.3 Protection Principle.......................................................................................................................... 76

3.5.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................77

3.6 Earth Fault Protection (67N/50/51N)..........................................................................78


3.6.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 78

3.6.2 Protection Principle.......................................................................................................................... 79

3.6.3 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................... 82

3.6.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................82

3.7 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64REF).............................................................. 87


3.7.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 87

3.7.2 Protection Principle.......................................................................................................................... 88

3.7.3 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................... 91

3.7.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................91

3.8 Winding Differential Protection (87W/N).................................................................. 92


3.8.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 92

3.8.2 Protection Principle.......................................................................................................................... 94

3.8.3 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................... 97

3.8.4 Settings...............................................................................................................................................98

3.9 Non-directional Instantaneous Earth Fault Protection(50N).............................. 99

PRS-778 3
Table of contents

3.9.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................ 99

3.9.2 Protection Principle........................................................................................................................ 100

3.9.3 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................. 100

3.9.4 Settings............................................................................................................................................ 101

3.10 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF).........................................................................101


3.10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 101

3.10.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 102

3.10.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................103

3.10.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 103

3.11 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59N)................................................................104


3.11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 104

3.11.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 106

3.11.3 Logic Diagram............................................................................................................................... 107

3.11.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 107

3.12 Three-phase overvoltage protection (59P)..........................................................111


3.12.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................111

3.12.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 112

3.12.3 Logic Diagram............................................................................................................................... 113

3.12.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 114

3.13 Three-phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)...................................................... 116


3.13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 116

3.13.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 117

3.13.3 Logic Diagram............................................................................................................................... 119

3.13.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 120

3.14 Overexcitation Protection (24)............................................................................... 122


3.14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 122

3.14.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 123

3.14.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................125

3.14.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 126

4 PRS-778
Table of contents

3.15 Overfrequency Protection(81O)............................................................................. 127

3.15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 127

3.15.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 129

3.15.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................129

3.15.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 130

3.16 Underfrequency Protection(81U)...........................................................................131


3.16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 131

3.16.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 132

3.16.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................133

3.16.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 133

3.17 Rate-of-change of frequency protection (81R).................................................. 134


3.17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 134

3.17.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 135

3.17.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................136

3.17.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 136

3.18 Reactor differential protection (87R).................................................................... 136


3.18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 136

3.18.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 138

3.18.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................143

3.18.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 143

3.19 Reactor zero-sequence differential protection (87N).......................................145


3.19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 145

3.19.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 145

3.19.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................148

3.19.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 148

3.20 Reactor interturn Protection (21IT)....................................................................... 149


3.20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 149

3.20.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 150

3.20.3 Logic Diagram...............................................................................................................................152

PRS-778 5
Table of contents

3.20.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 152

3.21 Out-of-Step Protection 78O.....................................................................................153


3.21.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 153

3.21.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 154

3.21.3 Logic............................................................................................................................................... 158

3.21.4 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 160

3.22 Mechanical Relay Protection (MR)........................................................................ 161


3.22.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................ 161

3.22.2 Protection Principle...................................................................................................................... 162

3.22.3 Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 163

4 Supervision...................................................................................................164
4.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................164

4.2 Supervision Alarm and Block.......................................................................................164

4.3 Current circuit supervision(CTS).............................................................................166


4.3.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 166

4.3.2 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................. 167

4.3.3 Protection Principle........................................................................................................................ 167

4.4 Reactor Current circuit supervision(CTS).............................................................168


4.4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 168

4.4.2 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................. 169

4.4.3 Protection Principle........................................................................................................................ 169

4.5 Fuse failure supervision(VTS).................................................................................. 169


4.5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 169

4.5.2 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................. 171

4.5.3 Protection Principle........................................................................................................................ 171

4.6 Reactor Fuse failure supervision(VTS).................................................................. 171


4.6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 171

4.6.2 Logic Diagram................................................................................................................................. 172

4.6.3 Protection Principle........................................................................................................................ 172

6 PRS-778
Table of contents

5 Monitoring&Control................................................................................... 173
5.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................173
5.2 Measurement.................................................................................................................173
5.2.1 Protection Sampling.......................................................................................................................173

5.2.2 Metering........................................................................................................................................... 173

5.3 Apparatus Control....................................................................................................... 174


5.4 Signaling........................................................................................................................ 174
5.5 Event Recording...........................................................................................................175
5.6 Fault and Disturbance Recording............................................................................175

6 IED Hardware............................................................................................... 177


6.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................177
6.2 Hardware Module......................................................................................................... 180
6.3 Human Machine Interface Module...........................................................................181
6.4 Power Supply Module.................................................................................................181
6.5 Main CPU Module.........................................................................................................183
6.6 AD module..................................................................................................................... 185
6.7 Transformer Module.................................................................................................... 185
6.8 Binary Input Module.................................................................................................... 188
6.9 Binary Output Module.................................................................................................190
6.10 Binary Input/Output Module....................................................................................192
6.11 MR Plug-in Module (Mechanical Relay Input/Output)...................................... 194

7 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE.............................................................. 196


7.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................196
7.1.1 Design Structure............................................................................................................................. 196

7.1.2 Function mode................................................................................................................................ 197

7.1.3 Operating panel keypad and keys...............................................................................................197

7.1.4 Indication of LED............................................................................................................................ 198

7.1.5 Configurable keys...........................................................................................................................200

7.2 LCD Diplay description of HMI................................................................................. 201


7.2.1 Ovierview......................................................................................................................................... 201

PRS-778 7
Table of contents

7.2.2 Normal display structure of LCD..................................................................................................201

7.2.3 Main menu display......................................................................................................................... 202

7.3 Sub menu functions of main menu.........................................................................203


7.3.1 Physical Information.......................................................................................................................203

7.3.2 Review Information........................................................................................................................ 205

7.3.3 Monitoring Information...................................................................................................................209

7.3.4 Event Information........................................................................................................................... 212

7.3.5 Record Information.........................................................................................................................217

7.3.6 Setting Information......................................................................................................................... 218

7.3.7 Configuration Information..............................................................................................................221

7.3.8 Test Information.............................................................................................................................. 224

7.3.9 Clear Information............................................................................................................................ 227

7.3.10 Language Information................................................................................................................. 228

8 Configurable Function.............................................................................. 230


8.1 General Description.................................................................................................... 230
8.2 Introduction of PRS IED StudioSoftware...............................................................230

9 Communication Protocol..........................................................................230
9.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................230
9.2 Rear Communication Interface................................................................................ 230
9.2.1 Ethernet Interface........................................................................................................................... 230

9.3 Network Topoloty......................................................................................................... 231


9.3.1 Star Topology.................................................................................................................................. 231

9.3.2 PRP Topology..................................................................................................................................231

9.3.3 RSTP Topology............................................................................................................................... 231

9.4 IEC61850Protocol........................................................................................................ 231


9.4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 231

9.4.2 Communication Profiles................................................................................................................ 232

9.4.3 Data set and control block............................................................................................................ 236

9.4.4 Logic nodes and data modeling...................................................................................................238

9.5 DNP3.0 Protocol........................................................................................................... 240

8 PRS-778
Table of contents

9.5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 240

9.5.2 Link Layer Functions......................................................................................................................240

9.5.3 Transport Functions....................................................................................................................... 240

9.5.4 Application Layer Functions..........................................................................................................240

9.6 IEEE 1588-2008 Protocol............................................................................................242


9.6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................... 242

9.6.2 Time Synchronization.................................................................................................................... 242

10 Commissioning......................................................................................... 243
10.1 General......................................................................................................................... 243
10.2 Safety Instructions.................................................................................................... 243
10.2.1 Safety Identification......................................................................................................................243

10.2.2 Safety Identification Examples...................................................................................................243

10.3 Commission Tools.....................................................................................................245


10.3.1 Instrumentation and Meters Notice:.......................................................................................... 245

10.3.2 Tools Requirement:...................................................................................................................... 245

10.4 Commission Preparation.........................................................................................245


10.4.1 Basic Knowledge..........................................................................................................................245

10.4.2 Operation Preparation................................................................................................................. 246

10.5 Product Checks..........................................................................................................246


10.5.1 Document Check..........................................................................................................................246

10.5.2 Appearance Inspection................................................................................................................246

10.5.3 Insulation Check........................................................................................................................... 247

10.5.4 External Wiring Check.................................................................................................................247

10.5.5 Test Category................................................................................................................................ 247

10.6 With the Relay Energized........................................................................................ 248


10.6.1 LCD Display Check......................................................................................................................248

10.6.2 Date and Time.............................................................................................................................. 248

10.6.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).....................................................................................................248

10.6.4 Test the AC Current Circuit......................................................................................................... 249

10.6.5 Test the AC Voltage Inputs......................................................................................................... 250

PRS-778 9
Table of contents

10.6.6 Test the Binary Inputs.................................................................................................................. 251

10.6.7 Test the Binary Onputs................................................................................................................ 251

10.6.8 Protection Function Checks....................................................................................................... 251

10.6.9 Printing Function Checks............................................................................................................251

10.6.10 On-load Checks..........................................................................................................................251

10.6.11 Final Checks............................................................................................................................... 252

11 Installation.................................................................................................. 253
11.1 General..........................................................................................................................253
11.2 Safety Instructions.................................................................................................... 253
11.3 Checking the Shipment............................................................................................ 253
11.4 Material and Tools Required................................................................................... 254
11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions...........................................................254
11.6 Mechanical Installation.............................................................................................255
11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring...........................................................................257
11.7.1 TACircuit Connection................................................................................................................... 257

11.7.2 Power Supply, VT, BI and BO, Signal Wiring...........................................................................257

11.7.3 Grounding...................................................................................................................................... 258

11.7.4 Shielded cable connection..........................................................................................................258

11.7.5 Install the optical cable................................................................................................................ 258

11.7.6 Install the communication cable.................................................................................................258

11.8 Installationcheck........................................................................................................ 259


11.8.1 Checktheinstallation..................................................................................................................... 259

11.8.2 Confirm the hardware and software version............................................................................259

11.8.3 Devicestart.....................................................................................................................................259

12 Maintenance...............................................................................................261
12.1 Maintenance General................................................................................................ 261
12.2 Regular Testing.......................................................................................................... 261
12.3 Failure Maintenance..................................................................................................261
12.3.1 Hardware Failure..........................................................................................................................261

12.3.2 Software Failure........................................................................................................................... 262

10 PRS-778
Briefly Introduction

12.4 Replace Failed Modules...........................................................................................262

13 Decommissioning and Disposal.......................................................... 263


13.1 Decommissioning......................................................................................................263
13.1.1 Switching off.................................................................................................................................. 263

13.1.2 Disconnecting cables...................................................................................................................263

13.1.3 Dismantling....................................................................................................................................263

13.2 Disposal........................................................................................................................263

14 Manual Version History...........................................................................267

1 Briefly Introduction

1.1 Application Scope


The PRS-778 is a numerical distributed transformer protection intended for protecting and
monitoring various transformers of various voltage level, ranging from 1000kV to 110kV. PRS-778
can detect and clear all types of internal faults.

PRS-778 provides fast and selective protection, monitoring and control for two and three-winding
transformers, autotransformers, step-up transformers and generator-transformer block units,
phase shifting transformers, special railway transformers, shunt reactors, etc. The relay can
operate correctly over a wide frequency range in order to accommodate power system frequency
variations during disturbances and generator start-up and shut-down.

This relay can sample the analog values from the traditional instrument transformers, or receive
the sampled values from the electronic current and voltage transformers (via a merging unit). The
binary inputs and outputs of this relay can be configured according to the demands of a practical
engineering through the PRS IED Studio configuration tool auxiliary software, which can meet
some special requirements of protection and control functions.

This relay can fully support the IEC61850 communication protocol and GOOSE function, and can
completely meet the demands of a modern digitalized substation.

1.2 Product Function


Table 1.2- 1 Functions included in the IEDs

Description IEC 60617 ANSI CYG Code


Transformer differential protection 3Id/I 87T 87T

PRS-778 11
Briefly Introduction

Description IEC 60617 ANSI CYG Code


Winding Differential Protection 3Id/I 87W 87W
MhoImpedance protection Z< 21 21M
Quadrilateral Impedance protection, Z< 21 21Q
Power swing detection Zpsb 68 68PS
Four stage directional overcurrent
3I> 67P 67P
protection
Three-phase thermal overload
- 49 49
protection
Earth Fault protection IN> 51G_67G 67N
Restricted Earth Fault protection IdN/I 87NL 64REF
Non-directional Instantaneous earth
IN>> 50N 50N
fault protection
3I0>
Breaker Failure Protection 50BF 50BF
I>
Threestage residual overvoltage
3U0 59N 59N
protection
Two stagethree-phase overvoltage
3U> 59P 59P
protection
Two stagethree-phaseundervoltage
3U< 27P 27P
protection
Overexcitation protection U/f 24 24
Overfrequency protection f> 81O 81O
Underfrequency protection f< 81U 81U
Rate-of-change frequency protection Df/dt<> 81R 81R
Reactor differential protection 3Id/I 87R 87R
Reactor zero-sequence differential
IdN/I 87N 87N
protection
Reactor interturn Protection - 21IT 21IT
Current circuit supervision - CTS CTS
Fuse failure supervision - - VTS

1.3 Product Features


 This device is based on a 32-bit high performance dual-core processor, internal high speed
bus and intelligent I/O ports, and the hardware is in modularized design and can be
configured flexibly, featuring interchangeability and easy extension and maintenance.

 Modularized hardware design makes this relay be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified
service person. Various function optional modules can satisfy various situations according to
the different requirements of the users..

 The adoption of 16-bit A/D converter and the dual-channel sampling technology can ensure
the accuracy and reliability of protection sampling and the correctness of protection operation.
It also provides dedicated current transformers for metering, and ensures the high accuracy of

12 PRS-778
Briefly Introduction

telemetering with 40-point high speed sampling rate per cycle.

 This device can sample the analog values from the traditional instrument transformers, or
receive the sampled values from the electronic transformers. It can support the protocol
IEC60044-8, IEC61850-9-2 and GOOSE.

 Various algorithms for protection and measurement have been completed in this device for
the feature of electronic transformer sampling, such as the error prevention method of
multi-algorithms data anomaly for the digital channels, to realize high accuracy and reliability
under various conditions of network faults or communication interruption.

 This device has powerful GOOSE functions, and the connection and cooperation between
some devices can be realized without using electrical cables, to facilitate the realization of
such functions as simple bus differential protection, overload interlock shedding function and
backup automatic transfer function etc.

 This device has fully realized the technology to integrate six functions into one device:
protection, measurement, control, remote signaling, merging unit function and remote module
functions, to improve the reliability.

 Various methods of GPS time synchronization are supported in this relay, including SNTP,
IEEE1588,pulse per second (PPS) and IRIG-B synchronization.

 The protection modules are completely separated from other modules, and are independent
in both hardware and software. The protection functions do not depend on the communication
network, so the failure of communication network will not affect the normal operation of the
protection functions.

 Mature protection configuration, fast speed and high security performance can meet the
practical requirements. Each protective element is independent, so it is very convenient for
whether adopting the selected protective element.

 This device constantly measures and calculates a large amount of analog quantities, such as
phase voltage, phase-to-phase voltage, neutral voltage, phase current, neutral current, active
power, reactive power, power factor and frequency etc.

 The human machine interface (HMI) with a small control module (a 240×128-dot LCD, a 9-key
keypad and 20 LED indicators) on the front panel is very friendly and convenient to the user.

 This device can communicate with a SAS or RTU via different communication intermediates:
thernet network, RS-485 serial ports. The communication protocol of this device is optional:
IEC61850, IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 or ModBus.

 This device can detect the tripping circuit of the circuit breaker and monitor the operation
(close or trip) time of a circuit breaker by checking the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker.

 Complete event recording function is provided: 64 latest protection operation reports, 1024
latest supervision records, 1024 latest control operation records, 1024 latest user operation
records and 1024 latest records of time tagged sequence of event (SOE) can be recorded.

 Powerful fault and disturbance recording function is supported: 64 latest fault or disturbance

PRS-778 13
Briefly Introduction

waves, the duration of a wave recording is configurable.

14 PRS-778
Technical Specifications

2 Technical Specifications

2.1 Electrical Specifications

2.1.1 Current Transformer Ratings


Reference IEC 60255-1,IEC 60255-27
Rated frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Nominal range fn ± 5Hz
Rated current (In) 1/5A
continuously 3×In
Thermal withstand capability for 10s 20×In
for 1s 100×In
Burden <0.05VA/phase @1A, <0.2VA/phase@5A

2.1.2 Voltage Transformer Ratings


Reference IEC 60255-1, IEC 60255-27
Rated frequency (fn) 50Hz, 60Hz
Nominal range fn ± 5Hz
Rated voltage (Un) 100V ~ 120V (phase-to-phase voltage)
continuously 240V
Thermal withstand capability 10s 360V
1s 400V
Burden at rated voltage < 0.03VA/phase @57.7V

2.1.3 Auxiliary Power Supply


Reference IEC 60255-1, IEC 60255-26
Rated voltage 24VDC~250VDC, 48V~250VAC
Variation 80% ~ 120%
Frequency 50/60Hz, ± 5Hz
Maximum interruption time in the 0%Un,100ms;
auxiliary DC voltage without resetting 40%Un,200ms;
the IED 70%Un,500ms
At the Un=DC220V
Gradual shut down / Start up Class C (60s shut down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s start up ramp)
Ripple in the DC auxiliary voltage Class A (15% of rated @200Hz, 220VDC)
≤20W (normal state)
1/2 19” Case:
Maximum load of auxiliary voltage ≤35W (maximum state)
supply ≤30W (normal state)
1/1 19” Case:
≤40W (maximum state)

2.1.4 Binary Input


Reference IEC 60255-1, Clause:6.10.5

PRS-778 15
Technical Specifications

Binary input number 1/2 19” Case:Up to 18


1/1 19” Case:Up to 36
Rated voltage 24VDC~250VDC, 64VAC~250VAC
Pickup voltage 55% ~ 70% rated voltage
“ON” value voltage 70% ~ 120% rated voltage
“OFF” value voltage < 55% rated voltage
Maximum permitted voltage 120% rated voltage
Resolution of binary input signal ≤ 1ms
Resolution of SOE ≤ 1ms

2.1.5 Binary Output


Reference IEC 60255-1
Item Tripping output Signal output
1/2 19” Case:Up to 12 1/2 19” Case:Up to 11
Binary output number
1/1 19” Case:Up to 48 1/1 19” Case:Up to 54
Output model Potential-free contact Potential-free contact
Max system voltage 380Vac, 250Vdc 380Vac, 250Vdc
Voltage across open contact 1000V RMS for 1min 1000V RMS for 1min
10A @ 380Vac; 5.0A @ 380Vac;
Continuous carry
10A @ 250Vd 5.0A @ 250Vdc
30A, 3s
Short duration current 30A, 1s
50A, 1s
1.00A @ 48Vdc, L/R=40ms
0.35A @ 110Vdc, L/R=40ms 0.60A @ 48Vdc, L/R=40ms
Breaking capacity 0.30A @ 125Vdc, L/R=40ms 0.10A @ 110Vdc, L/R=40ms
0.20A @ 220Vdc, L/R=40ms 0.05A @ 220Vdc, L/R=40ms
0.15A @ 250Vdc, L/R=40ms
Pickup time <5ms < 10ms
Dropout time < 5ms < 8ms

2.2 Mechanical Specifications


Mounting Way Flush mounted
1/2 19” Case: Approx. 9.9kg (fully equipped)
Weight per device
1/1 19” Case: Approx.19.5kg (fully equipped)
Merchanical size 1/2 19” Case: 260mm*266 mm *217.7 mm
(width×high×deepth) 1/1 19” Case:482.6mm*266 mm *217.7 mm
1/2 19” Case:227 mm *267 mm
Hole size (width×high)
1/1 19” Case: 450 mm *267 mm
Display language Optional: Chinese, English
Metallic plates, parts and screws: Steel
Housing material
Plastic parts: Polycarbonate
Housing color Silver grey
Location of terminal Rear panel of the device

16 PRS-778
Technical Specifications

Front side:IP40 (IP52 with seal strip)


Protection class IEC60225-1: 2009 Rear side, connection terminals: IP20
Other Sides: IP40

2.3 Ambient Temperature and Humidity Range


Standard IEC 60255-1:2009
Operating temperature range -40°C ~ +70°C
Transport and storage temperature
-40°C ~ +70°C
range
Damp heat steady +40℃ 93%humidity 16h
Damp-heat test, cyclic 6 cycles, +25℃ to +55℃, Humidity 97% to 93%

2.4 Communication Interfaces

2.4.1 Ethernet Port


Medium Parameters
Port number 3
Connector type RJ-45
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Electrical Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Transmission distance ≤ 100m
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997, IEC61850 etc.
Ethernet:
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Electrical
Port number 3
OR
Connector type LC
Optical
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Transmission standard 100Base-FX
Optical
Optical fiber type Multi-mode
Wavelength 1310nm
Transmission distance ≤ 2000m
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997, IEC61850 etc.
For Process Level (If reqired)
Medium Parameters
Port number 4
Connector type LC
Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
Optical Transmission standard 100Base-FX
Optical fiber type Multi-mode
Wavelength 1310nm
Transmission distance ≤ 2000m

2.4.2 Serial Port


Medium Parameters

PRS-778 17
Technical Specifications

Port number 2
Baud rate 4800 ~ 115200bps
Transmission distance ≤ 500m @ 4800bps
RS-485 (EIA)
Maximal capacity 32
Protocol IEC60870-5-103:1997, DNP3.0 etc.
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.4.3 Time Synchronization


Medium Parameters
Port number 1
Transmission distance ≤ 500m
RS-485 (EIA) Maximal capacity 32
Timing standard IRIG-B
Safety level Isolation to ELV level
Port number 1
Connector type ST
Optical Ethernet
Transmission distance ≤ 2000m
Timing standard IRIG-B
IEEE 1588 Accuracy ≤ 1ms

2.4.4 Ethernet Port for Debugging

Medium Parameters
Port number 1
Connector type RJ-45
Electrical Ethernet Transmission rate 100Mbits/s
(in front panel) Transmission standard 100Base-TX
Transmission distance ≤ 100m
Safety level Isolation to ELV level

2.5 Type Tests

2.5.1 Environmental Tests


IEC 60068-2-2, IEC
Dry heat operation test 16h, +70℃
60255-27
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC
Cold operation test 16h, -40℃
60255-27
IEC 60068-2-2, IEC
Dry heat storage test 16h , +70℃
60255-27
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC
Cold storage test 16h , -40℃
60255-27
Damp heat steady state IEC
test 60255-27,Clause10.5.1.5 +40℃ 93%humidity
+Verifcation of function IEC 60255-1,Clause

18 PRS-778
Technical Specifications

&dielectric (10 days) 6.12.3.6


IEC 60068-2-78

IEC 60068-2-30, IEC 6 cycles, +25℃ to +40℃, Humidity 97% to


Damp-heat test, cyclic
60255-27 93%

Change of temperature test IEC 60068-2-14 5 Cycles , 1℃/min, -40℃ to +70℃

2.5.2 Mechanical Tests

IEC 60255-21-1, IEC Class 1: Vibration Response: Class 1 (10-59Hz:


Vibration response test
60255-27 0.035mm, 59-150Hz: 0.5gn)

IEC 60255-21-1, IEC


Vibration Endurance: Class 1 (10-150Hz: 1gn)
60255-27
IEC 60255-21-2, IEC
Shock Response Class 1 (5gn)
60255-27
IEC 60255-21-2, IEC
Shock Withstands Class 1 (15gn)
60255-27
IEC 60255-21-2, IEC
Bump Class 1(10gn)
60255-27
IEC 60255-21-3
Seismic
IEC 60255-1, Clause Class I
+Verifcation of function
6.13.3

2.5.3 Electrical Tests


Impulse test: 5kV (rated insulation voltage ≤
Impulse Voltage Tests. IEC 60255-27 63V);Impulse test: 1kV (rated insulation voltage >
63V);
AC or DC Dielectric Test IEC 60255-27 dielectric 50,60Hz 5/60s DC 2.8KV AC 2KV
Insulation Resistance IEC 60255-27 >100Mohm @500Vdc
Protective Bonding Test current DC20A, >12 Vac /Vdc, >60s,< 0.1
IEC 60255-27
Resistance ohm

2.5.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Burst Disturbance Test / For Power Supply, Binary Input / Output:Common


IEC 60255-26, IEC
Damped Oscillatory Wave Mode: 2.5kV, Differential Mode: 1kV;For
61000-4-18
Immunity Test Communication Port:Common Mode: 1kV

IEC 60255-26, IEC


Electrostatic Discharge test Contact Discharge: 8kV, Air Discharge: 15kV
61000-4-2

PRS-778 19
Technical Specifications

IEC 60255-26, IEC (Power / Earth Port: 4kV, Signal / Control Port:
Fast Transient test
61000-4-4 2kV)

For Power Supply, Binary Input / Output: L-E: 4kV,


L-L: 2kV, voltage waveform: 1.2/50µs, current
IEC 60255-26, IEC
Surge Immunity Test waveform: 8/20µs;Communication Port: L-E: 1kV,
61000-4-5
L-L: -, voltage waveform: 1.2/50µs, current
waveform: 8/20µs )

Conducted radio IEC 60255-26, IEC


150kHz~80MHz(Uo: 140dB µV or Uo: 10V)
interference test 61000-4-6

Test Field Strength: 10V/m , Sweep frequency:


Electromagnetic fields IEC 60255-26, IEC 80MHz – 1000MHz, Spot frequency: 80MHz,
immunity 61000-4-3 160MHz, 450MHz, 900MHz @ 80% Modulation &
Pulse

Level 4 : continuous 30V,short duration 300V at


immunity to conduct,
50/3,50,60Hz; 15Hz~150Hz:30-3 decreases at
common mode disturbance
61000-4-16 20dB/decade; 150Hz~1.5kHz:3 constant;
in frequency range 0 Hz to
1.5kHz~15kHz:3-30 increases at 20dB/decade;
150KHz
15kHz~150kHz:30 constant

Power frequency magnetic IEC 61000-4-8, IEC Continuous: 100A/m, Short Duration 1s to 3s:
fields 60255-26 1000A/m)
Pulse magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-9 Class 5: Current 6.4/16µs, 1000A/m
immunity test

Damped oscillatory
magnetic field immunity IEC 61000-4-10 Class 5: 0.1MHz&1MHz, 100A/m
test

Power frequency immunity Input: Class A,Common Mode: 300V, Differential


IEC 60255-26
tests Mode: 150V
Ring wave immunity test IEC 61000-4-12 Ring Wave Class 4,4kV

Conducted Emission Limit for Auxiliary Power


Supply Port : Frequency range: 0.15MHz –
Conducted RF interference
IEC 60255-26, CISPR 22 0.5MHz (Quasi Peak: 79µV, Avg: 66µV),
on power supply terminals
Frequency range: 0.5MHz – 30MHz (Quasi
Peak: 73µV, Avg: 60µV);

20 PRS-778
Technical Specifications

Radiated Emission Limit on Enclosure Port :


Frequency range: 30MHz - 230MHz (Quasi Peak:
Radiated interference IEC 60255-26, CISPR 22
40µV), Frequency range: 230MHz - 1000MHz
(Quasi Peak: 47µV)

2.6 Terminals
Connection Type Wire Size
CT and VT circuit connectiors Screw terminals,4mm lead
2

Binary I/O connection system Screw terminals, 2.5mm2 lead

2.7 Measurement Range and Accuracy


Metering Item Range Accuracy
Phase range 0° ~ 360° ≤ 0.5% or ±1°
Frequency 35.00Hz ~ 70.00Hz ≤ 0.01Hz
Current ±0.5%In, 0.05In~1.00In
0.05In<I<4.00In
(three phase 3Ip) ±0.5%I, 1.00In~4.00In
Voltage ±0.5%Un, 0.05Un~1.00Un;
0.05Un<U<1.50Un
(Phase 3Up, Phase-to-Phase 3Upp) ±0.5%U, 1.00Un~1.50Un

2.8 ProtectionFunction Features


2.8.1 Transformer differential protection

2.8.1.1 Biased Differential Protection

Tolerance of 2 nd harmonic settings 0.01


Tolerance of 5 th harmonic settings 0.02
≤2.5% of operating current or 0.02In., whichever is
Tolerance of operating current
greater
50Hz: ≤ 30ms (Id>2 times current setting)
Operating time (without blocking criteria)
60Hz: ≤ 25ms (Id>2 times current setting)

2.8.1.2 Instantaneous Differential Protection

Tolerance of current setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.02In., whichever is greater


50Hz: ≤ 20ms (Id>1.5 times current setting)
Operating time
60Hz: ≤ 20ms (Id>1.5 times current setting)

2.8.2 Impedance Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Time delay accuracy ≤25ms(at 4 times current setting)

PRS-778 21
Technical Specifications

2.8.3 Directional Overcurrent Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 98%
Time delayaccuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤ 2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
(start value multiples in range of 1.2…20 when I> In)
Time delay accuracy (inverse-time characteristic)
≤5.0% of operating time or 40ms, whichever is greater
(start value multiples in range of 2…20 when I≤ In)

2.8.4 Thermal Overload Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 98%
≤ 2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
(start value multiples in range of 1.2…20 when I> In)
Time delay accuracy
≤5.0% of operating time or 40ms, whichever is greater
(start value multiples in range of 2…20 when I≤ In)

2.8.5 Directional Earth Fault Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 98%
Time delayaccuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 2 times current setting)
≤ 2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
(start value multiples in range of 1.2…20 when I> In)
Time delay accuracy (inverse-time characteristic)
≤5.0% of operating time or 40ms, whichever is greater
(start value multiples in range of 2…20 when I≤ In)

2.8.6 Restricted Earth Fault Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Time delay accuracy ≤25ms(at 4 times current setting)

2.8.7 Non-directional Instantaneous Earth Fault Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.02In, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 98%

2.8.8 Residual Overvoltage Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 98%
Time delayaccuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 1.2 times voltage setting)
≤ 2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
Time delay accuracy (inverse-time characteristic)
(for voltage between 1.2 and 2 multiples of pickup)

2.8.9 Overvoltage protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater

22 PRS-778
Technical Specifications

Resetting ratio 98%


Time delayaccuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 1.2 times voltage setting)
≤ 2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
Time delay accuracy (inverse-time characteristic)
(for voltage between 1.2 and 2 multiples of pickup)

2.8.10 Undervoltage Protection


Accuracy ≤ 2.5% Setting or 0.01Un, whichever is greater
Resetting ratio 102%
Time delayaccuracy (definite-time characteristic) ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 0.8 times voltage setting)
≤ 2.5% of operating time or 30ms, whichever is greater
Time delay accuracy (inverse-time characteristic)
(for voltage between 0.5 and 0.8 multiples of pickup)

2.8.11 Overexcitation Protection


Multiple setting of definitetime 1.0~1.6
Multiple setting of inversetime 1.0~1.7
Tolerance of Multiple setting ≤2.5% of setting or 0.01, whichever is greater
Drop-off to pickup ratio ≥97%
50Hz: ≤25 ms (at 2 times current setting)
Operating time
60Hz: ≤23 ms (at 2 times current setting)
Time delay setting 0.1~9999 (s)
Tolerance of time setting ≤1% of setting +30ms (at 2 times setting)
Drop-off time ≤30ms

2.8.12 Overfrequency protection


Accuracy ≤0.02Hz
Time delayaccuracy ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 1.2 times frequency setting)

2.8.13 Underfrequency protection


Accuracy ≤0.02Hz
Time delayaccuracy ≤1%Setting+30ms (at 0.8 times frequency setting)

2.8.14 Rate-of-change frequency protection


Frequency setting 45~60 (Hz)
Tolerance of frequency setting ≤ 0.02Hz
Time setting 0~100 (s)
Tolerance of time setting ≤1%Setting+100ms (at 1.2 times frequency setting)

PRS-778 23
Protection Functions

3 Protection Functions

3.1 Overview
The PRS-778 relay is a microprocessor based relay which can provide mature protection for
various primary equipments (generally all types of transformers etc.). The following sections detail
the individual protection functions of this relay.

The golssary will be listed in the below form.

Category Profession Vocabulary Abbreviation


Time T
Phase Ph
Direction Dir
Overcurrent OC
Curve Curve
Temperature Temp
Characteristic Char
Polarity Pol
Quantity Qua
Factor Factor
Current Cur
Residual Current ResCur
Negative Current NegCur
Positive Current PosCur
Voltage Vol
Residual Voltage ResVol
Electricity
Negative Voltage NegVol
Positive Voltage PosVol
High Voltage HigVol
Low Voltage LowVol
thermal Therm
Overload OL
Negative Neg
Sequence Seq
Residual Res
Beta Beta
harmonic Harm
Power Pow
Earth-fault EF
Failure Fail
Impedence Imp
Reactance React

PRS-778 25
Supervision

Category Profession Vocabulary Abbreviation


Induction Induct
Positive Posi
Block Blk
Enable Ena
Operation Op
Trip Tr
Protection Prot
Mode Mod
Forward Fwd
Reverse Rev
Constant Const
External Ex
Internal In
Number Num
Selector Sel
Measurement Meas
Parameter Para
Multiplier Mult
Minimum Min
Alarm Alm
Reclose Recls
Counter Counter
Operation
Correction Correction
Available Avai
Initial Init
Reference Ref
Normal Norm
Restraint Restr
Slope Slope
deblock Deblk
Winding Wnd
Elimination Elim
Nominal Nom
Connection Connection
Hysteresis Hyst
Compensation Comp
Check Chk
Synchronize Syn
Synchronization Syn
Energize Energ
Weigh Weig
Activation / Activate Activ

26 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Category Profession Vocabulary Abbreviation


Error Err
Configuration Cfg
Parameter Para
Management Mana
Interrupt Intr
SelfCheck SelfChk
Start Str
Generator Gen
Motor Motor
Rotor Rotor
Stator Stator
Busbar Bus
Transformer TF
Apparatus Transmission Line TL
Line Line
Capacitor Cap
Reactor Reac
Resistor Resis
Switch Sw
Component Comp

3.1.1 System Setting


Table 3.1.1 Settings of System

NO Name Range Unit Step Default Description


1 Sn 0.1~3000 MVA 0.1 200 Transformer or reactor capacity
2 Un_HV 0.1~1200 kV 0.01 110 Rated voltage at HV side
3 Un_MV 0.1~1200 kV 0.01 35 Rated voltage at MV side
4 Un_LV 0.1~1200 kV 0.01 10 Rated voltage at LV side
Y/△Type at HV side
5 Phi_HV 0~1 1 0 0: Y Type
1:△Type
6 Phi_MV 0~11 1 0 Clock connection at MV side
7 Phi_LV 0~11 1 11 Clock connection at LV side
8 VT1n_HV 0.1~1200 V 0.01 110 Primary value of VT at HV side
9 VT1n_MV 0.1~1200 V 0.01 35 Primary value of VT at MV side
10 VT1n_LV 0.1~1200 V 0.01 10 Primary value of VT at LV side
11 VT2n 30~300 V 0.01 100 Secondary value of VT
12 I1n_H1V 0~12000 A 1 1200 Primary value of CT at H1V side
13 I1n_H2V 0~12000 A 1 1200 Primary value of CT at H2V side
14 I1n_M1V 0~12000 A 1 2000 Primary value of CT at M1V side
15 I1n_M2V 0~12000 A 1 2000 Primary value of CT at M2V side

PRS-778 27
Protection Functions

NO Name Range Unit Step Default Description


16 I1n_L1V 0~12000 A 1 4000 Primary value of CT at L1V side
17 I1n_L2V 0~12000 A 1 4000 Primary value of CT at L2V side
18 I2n_H1V 1 or 5 A 4 1 Secondary value of CT at H1V side
19 I2n_H2V 1 or 5 A 4 1 Secondary value of CT at H2V side
20 I2n_M1V 1 or 5 A 4 1 Secondary value of CT at M1V side
21 I2n_M2V 1 or 5 A 4 1 Secondary value of CT at M2V side
22 I2n_L1V 1 or 5 A 4 1 Secondary value of CT at L1V side
23 I2n_L2V 1 or 5 A 4 1 Secondary value of CT at L2V side
Primary value of zero-sequence CT at
24 I1n_HVN 0~12000 A 1 1200
HV side
Primary value of zero-sequence CT at
25 I1n_MVN 0~12000 A 1 2000
MV side
Primary value of zero-sequence CT at
26 I1n_LVN 0~12000 A 1 4000
LV side
Secondary value of zero-sequence CT
27 I2n_HVN 1 or 5 A 4 1
at HV side
Secondary value of zero-sequence CT
28 I2n_MVN 1 or 5 A 4 1
at MV side
Secondary value of zero-sequence CT
29 I2n_LVN 1 or 5 A 4 1
at LV side
Whether theZero sequence current is
filtered off the low voltage side
30 I0_Rem_LV_En 0,1 1 0
0: disable
1: enable
Example for Connection Scheme:
1) If the project uses Yyd-11.The setting Phi_HV=0,Phi_MV=12,Phi_LV=11;
2) If the project uses Ydd-11.The setting Phi_HV=0,Phi_MV=11,Phi_LV=11;
3) If the project uses Dyy-11.The setting Phi_HV=1,Phi_MV=11,Phi_LV=11;
4) If the project uses Ddy-11.The setting Phi_HV=1,Phi_MV=12,Phi_LV=11;

3.2 Transformer Differential Protection (87T)


3.2.1 Overview
In electrical power system or electrical power industry, power transformer is the one of the most
precious and main important primary equipment. For this main point of view, the protection of
power transformer is very important task. If some kind of trouble or fault situation happen in the
protected zone of the power transformer, then need to clear this trouble or fault as soon as
possible. Transformer differential protection (87T) is specially designed for such kind of trouble or
fault situation to protect transformer from maximum cause of injuries or harm and operate the
protection as quick as possible.

Transformer differential protection (87T) have two dependable operating function of element likes
biased differential element and instantaneous differential element.

28 PRS-778
Protection Functions

1) Biased differential element is operation based on with three characteristics slope.

2) Instantaneous differential element increase the operating speed of protection during internal
fault of transformer without three characteristics slope of biased differential element and
blocking function (CT saturation, CT failure and Harmonics effect).

3) Some other important and superior special functions of 87T protection are:

 Meticulousphase compensation IED calculation criteria.


 Accurate and fast fault tracking capability.
 Inrush current distinguish operating principle.
 Special capability to detect overexcitation condition of transformer.

Above mentioned these four element of transformer differential protection function are highly
proved to sense quickly any abnormal situation in protected zone of transformer and in case of any
abnormalty is detected then very fast trip command is issued.

Notice!

Point of view of user’s project and real time experience, some of the pretection function of
transformer differential protection (87T) are enable or disable according to the customer’s or
user’s demand of situation.

PRS-778 29
Protection Functions

3.2.1.1 Function Block

3.2.1.2 Signals

Table 3.2- 187T Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ida, Idb, Idc Three phase differential current of 87T

2 87T_Blk Block signal of 87T

Table 3.2- 287T Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 87T _Str Start signal ofdifferential from 87T

2 87T _Str_A Start_A signal ofdifferential from 87T

3 87T _Str_B Start_B signal ofdifferential from 87T

4 87T _Str_C Start_C signal ofdifferential from 87T

5 87T_ Op Operation signal ofdifferential from 87T

6 87T_Inst_Str Start signal of instantaneous differential from 87T

30 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description

7 87T_Inst_Str_A Start_A signal of instantaneous differential from 87T

8 87T_Inst_Str_B Start_B signal of instantaneous differential from 87T

9 87T_Inst_Str_C Start_C signal of instantaneous differential from 87T

10 87T_ Inst_Op Operation signal of instantaneous differential from 87T

11 87T_Inrush_A Inrush_A Block signal from 87T

12 87T_Inrush_B Inrush_B Block signal from 87T

13 87T_Inrush_C Inrush_C Block signal from 87T

14 87T_Inrush Inrush Block signal from 87T

15 87T_5Harm_A 5Harm_A Block signal from 87T

16 87T_5Harm_B 5Harm_B Block signal from 87T

17 87T_5Harm_C 5Harm_C Block signal from 87T

18 87T_CTFail CT failsignal from 87T

3.2.2 Protection Principle

3.2.2.1 Phase compensation

To simplify field wiring and improve (phase current) inrush current restrained characteristics, this
device requires Y shaped connection for CT at each side of transformer and the connection for CT
at each side based on the same polarity. Busbar side is taken as polarity end as shown in
application configuration diagram in below figure.Inside the device, phase shift is performed at Y
connection side of transformer and its performance will be identical with the performance of CT
with Δ shaped connection. The relay device can be applicable for all kinds of winding connection
types and the phase shifting can be internally automatically performed according the clock number
setting.

Schematic diagram of Y→Δ current conversion at secondary side of CT is as below:

11 o’clock 1 o’clock
connection connection
Iab=Ia-Ib Iac=Ia-Ic
Ibc=Ib-Ic Iba=Ib-Ia
Ica=Ic-Ia Icb=Ic-Ib

Figure 3.2- 111 o’clock connection and 1 o’clock connection

In addition, the device also regulates the difference in transformation ratio between CTs at each
side of transformer. Each side is provided with a CT transformation ratio regulation coefficient

PRS-778 31
Protection Functions

which is multiplied by current quantity collected by the device to get the quantity after regulation of
CT transformation ratio. By simply entering relevant parameters of transformer (refer to the table
of settings), it’s possible to automatically obtain regulation coefficient of CT at each side without
the need for external connection with auxiliary CT. Such type of regulation is more reliable when
compared with regulation performed using hardware circuit.

This device only performs phase shift for current at Y connection side. In case of 11 o’clock
connection at △ side, phase shift at Y side could be performed as below:

'
= − / 3

'
= − / 3

'
= − / 3

In case of 1 o’clock connection at △ side, phase shift at Y side could be performed as below:

'
= − / 3

'
= − / 3

'
= − / 3

Table3.3-3 Matrixofphasecompensation

Yy0  IA  1 -1 0   IA   Ia  1 -1 0   Ia 


  1      1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB   I b    0 1 -1   Ib 
3   I  3 
 I   -1 0 1   IC   -1 0 1   Ic 
 C    c  

Yd1  IA  1 0 -1  IA 


  1   
 I B    -1 1 0    IB 
 I  3 
 0 -1 1   IC 
 C  

Yy2  IA  1 -1 0   IA   Ia   0 -1 1   Ia 


  1      1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB   I b    1 0 -1    Ib 
3  I  3
 I   -1 0 1   IC   -1 1 0   Ic 
 C    c  

Yd3  IA  0 1 -1  IA 


  1   
 I B    -1 0 1    IB 
 I  3 
1 -1 0   IC 
 C  

32 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Yy4  IA  1 -1 0   IA   Ia   -1 0 1   Ia 


  1      1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB   I b    1 -1 0    Ib 
3   I  3 
 I   -1 0 1   IC   0 1 -1  Ic 
 C    c  

Yd5  IA   -1 1 0   IA 


  1   
 I B     0 -1 1    IB 
 I  3
1 0 -1  IC 
 C  

Yy6  IA  1 -1 0   IA   Ia   -1 1 0   Ia 


  1      1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB   I b    0 -1 1    Ib 
3   I  3 
 I   -1 0 1   IC  1 0 -1   Ic 
 C    c  

Yd7  IA   -1 0 1   IA 


  1   
 I B    1 -1 0    IB 
 I  3 
 0 1 -1   IC 
 C  

Yy8  IA  1 -1 0   IA   Ia  0 1 -1  Ia 


  1      1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB   I b    -1 0 1    Ib 
3   I  3 
 I   -1 0 1   IC  1 -1 0   Ic 
 C    c  

Yd9  IA  0 -1 1   IA 


  1   
 I B    1 0 -1   IB 
 I  3 
 -1 1 0   IC 
 C  

Yy10  IA  1 -1 0   IA   Ia  1 0 -1   Ia 


  1      1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB   I b    -1 1 0    Ib 
3   I  3 
 I   -1 0 1   IC   0 -1 1   Ic 
 C    c  

Yd11  IA  1 -1 0   IA 


  1   
 I B    0 1 -1   IB 
 I  3 
 -1 0 1   IC 
 C  

Dy1  Ia  1 -1 0   Ia 


  1   
 I b    0 1 -1    Ib 
 I  3 
 -1 0 1   Ic 
 c  

PRS-778 33
Protection Functions

Dy3  Ia  0 -1 1   Ia 


  1   
 I b    1 0 -1    Ib 
 I  3 
 -1 1 0   Ic 
 c  

Dy5  Ia   -1 0 1   Ia 


  1   
 I b    1 -1 0    Ib 
 I  3 
 0 1 -1  Ic 
 c  

Dy7  Ia   -1 1 0   Ia 


  1   
 I b    0 -1 1    Ib 
 I  3 
1 0 -1   Ic 
 c  

Dy9  Ia  0 1 -1  Ia 


  1   
 I b    -1 0 1    Ib 
 I  3 
1 -1 0   Ic 
 c  

Dy11  Ia  1 0 -1  Ia 


  1   
 I b    -1 1 0    Ib 
 I  3 
 0 -1 1   Ic 
 c  

3.2.2.2 Magnitude Compensation

 Rated primary current at each side of transformer

1 =
3 1

Where:

means maximum rated capacity of transformer nameplate, and 1 represents rated


primary voltage at calculated side of transformer.

The formula above applies to calculation of rated primary current of switch CT at HV, MV and LV
sides; as for bushing CT at LV side, the rated primary current is given by:

1 = =
3 3 1 3 1

CT transformation ratio at each side of transformer

34 PRS-778
Protection Functions

1
=
2

Where, 2 rated secondary current of CT is 5A or 1A; 1 "primary side of CT” is dependent on


corresponding settings of system parameters.

Rated secondary current at each side of transformer

1
2 =

CT balance coefficient at each side of differential protection

With HV side as reference, the balance coefficient at HV side is fixedly set to 1.

Balance coefficient at MV side:

2 − 1 / / 3 1 1
ℎ − = = = × = ×
2 − 1 / / 3 1 1

Balance coefficient at LV side (switch CT):

2 − 1 / / 3 1 1
ℎ − = = = × = ×
2 − 1 / / 3 1 1

In the formula, means CT transformation ratio of CB at LV side, while U_1nL represents


rated voltage at LV side.

3.2.2.3 Fault detector based on biased differential current

The fault detector can initiate biased differential element, and its operation equation is shownas
below.

Idmax>0.9*87T_Cur_Str

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

3.2.2.4 Fault detector based on instantaneous differential current

The fault detector can initiate instantaneous differential element, and its operation equation is
shownas below.

Idmax>0.9*87T_Cur_Inst

Where:

PRS-778 35
Protection Functions

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

3.2.2.5 Calculation of Differential and Restraint Currents

The equation of calculating differential current is:

 I dA  I A1  I A 2  I A 3  I A 4  I A 5  I A 6

I dB  I B 1  I B 2  I B 3  I B 4  I B 5  I B 6
I  I   I   I   I   I   I 
 dC C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6

The equation of calculating restraint current is:

 1
 I rA  2   I A1  I A2  I A3  I A4  I A5  I A6 
 1
 I rB    I B 1  I B 2  I B 3  I B 4  I B 5  I B 6 
 2
1
I rC    I C 1  I C 2  I C 3  I C 4  I C 5  I C 6 
 2

Where:

I'Am, I'Bm, I'Cm are corrected secondary current of branch m (m=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).

IdA, IdB, IdC are differential currents.

IrA, IrB, IrC are restraint currents.

3.2.2.6 Biased Low Stage

The currents for following calculation are the results of the actual secondary current of each side
multiplying its own correction coefficient. The biased low stage with low start setting and restraint
slope is much more sensitive for a slight internal fault. The function includes four blocking
elements: CT saturation, inrush current, overexcitation and CT circuit failure (optional) to prevent it
from the unwanted operation during the shortcircuits outside the protected area, the large currents
fed by the transformer inmotor startup or the transformer inrush situations.

> 1 × + < 1

> 2 × − 1 + 1 × 1 + 1 ≤ < 2

> 3 × − 2 + 2 × 2 − 1 + 1 × 1 + ≥ 2

m
Id   Ii
i 1
m
1
Ir 
2
| Ii
i 1
|

36 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Where:

I d and I r are respectively the differential current and the restraint current.

I Str is the start setting of biased differential protection (i.e., 87T_Cur_Str).

“Knee1” and “Knee2” are respectively current settings of knee point 1 and knee point 2, the
corresponding set value: 87T_Cur_K1 and 87T_Cur_K2).

“K1”, “K2” and “K3” are three slopes of biased differential protection, the corresponding set
value: 87T_Slope1, 87T_Slope2, 87T_Slope3.

Operation characteristic of sensitive biased differential element is shown below.

Figure 3.2- 2 Operation characteristic of differential protection

3.2.2.7 Instantaneous High Stage

Instantaneous high stage for transformer is to accelerate the operation speed for transformer's
internal fault. The operation of the instantaneous high stage is not biasedand has no blocking
element. Instantaneoushigh stage shall operate to clear the fault when any phase differential
current is higher than its setting. Its operation criterion is:

Idmax> 87T_Cur_Inst

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

3.2.2.8 Inrush Current Discrimination

The device provides optional inrush current distinguished principles: harmonic principle (second
harmonic) or waveform symmetry principle. The logic setting 87T_Opt_Inrushis used to select
distinguished principle.

PRS-778 37
Protection Functions

 Inrush current discrimination based on harmonics

The ratio of second harmonic in three-phase differential current to fundamental harmonic is taken
as criterion for blocking of inrush exciting current, and the operating formula is given as below:

I2nd  K 2xb • I1st

Where:

I 2 nd means second harmonic in differential current at each phase;

I1st represents fundamental harmonic of differential current at corresponding phase; K 2 xb is

second harmonic restraint coefficient.

This device incorporates our proprietary second harmonic compound logic restraint principle
which has been proven through substantial operation cases. Details are described as below:

 As for transformer with  /  connection, differential current reflects the difference of current
phasor between two phases at  shaped connection side. In case of charging of no-load
transformer at  shaped connection side, the relatively obvious inrushing characteristic
(second harmonic content or intermission angle) in single-phase current may be weakened
after currents at two phases subtract each other. If this is the case, the traditional method (that
is, to realize restraint by extracting second harmonic component from differential current) may
not work. Since CT at  side of transformer is connected in the  shape, second harmonic in
the original two phase currents could be used for restraint when second harmonic of
differential current fails to perform the restraint. This could significantly improve the reliability
of inrush restraint.

 With respect to conventional second harmonic inrush restraint, biased differential protections
at all the three phase will be blocked in case of inrush restraint if with differential current at any
phase, and this is referred to as “or” logic. If restraint is performed simply as “or” logic,
differential protection may operate at a relatively low rate in case ofcharginga faulty
transformer with no load. This device conducts a complex inrush current restraint logic based
on the differential currents,which is distinguished in the inrush current and fault current at
three phases.If there is no fault in the transformer, "or”restraint logic is used to reliably block
trippingeven large inrush current is generated. In case that a faulty transformer withoutany
loadis switched on, split-phase restraint mode would be automatically activated. The
split-phase restraint modeensures that percentage differential protection can still operate
rapidly and sensitively when a faulty transformer without any load is switched on.

 Inrush current discrimination based on waveform symmetry principle

In case of fault, differential current basicallydisplays power frequency sine wave, while in case of
inrush exciting current, waveform would be subjected to distortion, interruption and asymmetry
due to the existence of substantial harmonic components. It’s possible to identify inrush exciting
current by identifying such distortion using algorithms.

38 PRS-778
Protection Functions

In case of fault, the following formulais fulfilled:

S  Kb * S

Where:

I i  I  T
i
S  means half-wave integral quantity of 2
;

I i  I  T
i
S  represents the half-wave integral quantity of 2
;

k b iswaveform asymmetry coefficient. I i represents the numerical value of differential current

I' T
i
derivative at some certain point of first-half wave, while 2 means the numerical value of

differential current derivative at the corresponding point of second-half wave.


k b is normally

set to be 0.1~0.2 and this device takes 0.2.

3.2.2.9 CT Saturation Detection

To prevent incorrect tripping of differential protection caused by CT saturation in case of external


fault, CT saturation detection element of the device would judge the saturation of CT and
determine whether to block relevant differential protection.

In case of internal fault:

n n


i 1
D Ii  
i
D Ii
1

Where:

"n” means the number of sides shared by transformers.

The left part of above equation is restraint current, while the right part is differential
current.Theequation is not fulfilled in case of either external fault or external fault under the
condition of saturated CT. As a matter of fact, since CT saturation induced differential current
always comes into being after a certain period of time of CT saturation, the device determines if
saturation has occurred by taking advantage of the temporal consistency between restraint current
and differential current.If saturation has occurred, the percentage differential restraint coefficient
would be automatically driven up so as to assure the reliability of differential protection and the
quick operation in case of conversion of external fault saturation into internal fault.

PRS-778 39
Protection Functions

3.2.2.10 Overexcitation Detection

When a transformer is overexcited, the exciting current will increase sharply which may result in
an unwanted operation of differential protection. Therefore the overexcitation shall be
discriminated to block differential protection. The fifth harmonic of differential current can be
selected to determinate overexcitation.

Id_5th> 87T_K_Hm5 ×Id_1st

Where:

Id_1st is the fundamental component of differential current.

Id_5th is the fifth harmonic of differential current.

The fifth harmonic is recommended to be selected for overexcitation calculation.

3.2.2.11 Differential CT circuit abnormality

If the differential current in any phase is continually greater than the alarm setting 87T_Cur_Alm
over 10s, the differential current abnormality alarm will be issued, but this alarm will not block
differential protection.

Figure 3.2-3Differential CT Circuit Abnormality

3.2.2.12 Differential CT circuitfailure

This is a differential protection CT circuit failure criterion.

First of all, the possibility of concurrence of multi-side CT line-break and fault is not taken into
consideration. Under this premise, it’s possible to distinguish between CT circuit failure and fault
based on the following characteristic.In case of CT circuit failure, it’s necessary to specifically
identify circuit failure phase.

Single-phase or two-phase CTcircuit failure:

CT circuit failure Fault


Abrupt change of current at line-break Abrupt change of current at
Current variation
side only multiple sides
Current variation
From high to low From low to high
tendency
Current amplitude  0 .08 In  In
In case the abrupt current variation is greater than 5~10%IN, abrupt current variation would be
deemed to have occurred.

40 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Alarm signal will be issued when CT circuit failure lasts for 10s, and in such a case, whether or not
to instantaneously block relevant differential protection is determined bysetting.The condition for
reset of CT circuit failure is that there's no negative-sequence current at this side.The
negative-sequence current at this side is lower than threshold of CT line-break negative-sequence
current (fixed value).

Blocking of biased differential protection by CT circuit failure follows the following principle:

 When “CTS_Blk_Ena” is set to “1”, biased differential protection would be blocked in case of
CT circuit failure (as for longitudinal percentage differential protection and split-phase
percentage differential protection, differential protection would be blocked when differential
current is less than 1.2Ie and would not when more than 1.2Ie; with respect to cell differential
protection, differential protection would be blocked when differential current is less than 1.2ILe
and would not when more than 1.2ILe. Here, Ie means rated secondary current at HV side of
transformer, while ILe represents rated secondary current at LV side of transformer).

 When “CTS_Blk_Ena” is set to “0”, biased differential protection would not be blocked in case
of CT circuit failure.

Where:

"CTS_Blk_Ena” is effective for Biased low stage.

It should be noted that CT circuit failure induced blocking is principally designed to prevent
malfunction of differential protection caused by CT circuit failure and follows the following
principles:

Firstly, concurrence of multi-side CT circuit failureis not taken into account; secondly, differential
protection trip is allowed in case of concurrence of failure and CT circuit failure; thirdly, relevant
protection should be blocked when fault occurs after CT circuit failure; fourthly, protection shall
operate if CT circuit failure occurs after the occurrence of fault.

3.2.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.2- 4 Logic diagram of 87T_Inst protection

PRS-778 41
Protection Functions

Figure 3.2- 5 Logic diagram of 87T protection

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

“87T_CT_Satu” means that the flag of CT Saturation.

“87T_Inrush” means that the flag of Inrush current

“87T_CTFail” means that the flag of CT circuit failure.

3.2.4 Settings
Table 3.2- 3 Settings of Transformer differential protection

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


Pickup setting of biased
1 87T_Cur_Str 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 0.40
differential element
Current setting of instantaneous
2 87T_Cur_Inst 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 6.00
differential element
Current setting of differential
3 87T_Cur_Alm 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00
circuit abnormality alarm
Coefficient of second harmonics
4 87T_K_Hm2 0.05~0.50 - 0.01 0.15
for inrush current detection
Coefficient offive harmonics for
5 87T_K_Hm5 0.05~0.50 - 0.01 0.35
inrush current detection
Current setting of knee point 1 for
6 87T_Cur_K1 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00
transformer differential protection
Current setting of knee point 2 for
7 87T_Cur_K2 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 6.00
transformer differential protection
8 87T _Slope1 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.00 Slope 1 of biased differential

42 PRS-778
Protection Functions

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


element
Slope 2 of biased differential
9 87T _Slope2 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.50
element
Slope 3 of biased differential
10 87T _Slope3 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.75
element
Option of inrush current
discrimination principle:
0: waveform symmetry
11 87T_Opt_Inrush 0~3 - 1 0
1: Harmonic principle
2: Comprehensive principle
3:Without Inrush CurrentBlock
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling conventional
12 87T _Ena 0,1 - 1 0 biased differential element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling instantaneous
13 87T_Inst_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 differential element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling differential
14 87T_Alm_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 Alam element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling block
15 87T_Hm5_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 overexcitation
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling block biased
differential element during CT
16 87T_CTS_Blk_Ena 0,1 1 0
circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable

3.3 Distance Protection 21


3.3.1 Overview
The main function of Distance protection (21) is to provide very sensitive and accurate operation of

PRS-778 43
Protection Functions

protection where overcurrent protection and earth fault protection cannot meet the required high
standard of protection. Such kind of protection operates based on the ratio of voltage and current
is known as impedance or distance protection. The ratio of current and voltage directly measured
by current transformer (CT) and voltage transformer (PT or VT) respectively.

Distance protection (21) relay device provide forward or reverse five settable zone.

Every zone of distance protection is providing dependable settings and full design scheme of
measurement phase to phase (line value) and phase to earth (phase value). The characteristics of
distance protection zone are:

 Mho characteristics

o Phase to phase (line value) distance element


o Phase to earth (phase value) distance element

 Quadrilateral characteristics

o Phase to phase (line value) distance protection


o Phase to earth (phase value) distance protection
o Reactance line element
o Direction line element
o Resistance line element

 Power swing blocking releasing (PSBR)

o Each zone can be easily configuring PSBR setting

When VT circuit fails, VT circuit supervision logic will output a blocking signal to block all
distanceprotection.

Distance protection can select line VT or bus VT for protection algorithm by a settingVTS_LineVT.

3.3.2 Parameters
Table 3.3- 1 Parameters

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


Positive-sequence
impedance of the
1 Z1 (0.05~655)/In ohm 0.01 10
wholeline (secondary
value)

Positive-sequence
2 Z1Ang 10~89 deg 0.01 85
impedance angle

Zero-sequence
impedance of the
3 Z0 (0.05~655)/In ohm 0.01 30
wholeline (secondary
value)

4 Z0Ang 30~89 deg 0.01 80 Zero-sequence

44 PRS-778
Protection Functions

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


impedance angle

Zero-sequence
5 Kz 0~10.000 0.001 0.67 compensation
coefficient magnitude

Zero-sequence
6 KzAng 0~360.00 deg 0.01 0 compensation
coefficient angle

3.3.3 Fault Detector FD


3.3.3.1 Function Block

3.3.3.2 Signals

Table 3.3- 2 FD Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ia,Ib,Ic Three-phase current input

2 Ua,Ub,Uc Three-phase voltage input

3 start Other protection start signal

Table 3.3- 3 FD Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 FD_Pkp The device picks up

2 FD_SupCur_Pkp Superimposed current fault detector element operates

3 FD_ResCur_Pkp Residual current fault detector element operates

4 FD_NegCur_Pkp Negative-sequence current fault detector element operates

3.3.3.3 Fault Detector Based on Superimposed Current

Superimposed phase current is obtained by subtracting the phase current from that of acycle
before.

PRS-778 45
Protection Functions

∆I = I k − I(k − N)

I k is the sampling value at a point.

I(k - N) is the value of a sampling point before a cycle.

Operation criteria:

∆Iφ = 1.25∆ITh + ∆ISet

Where:

∆Iφ : Superimposed phase current (Φ=A, B, C)

∆ISet : The fixed threshold value (i.e. the setting FD_SupCur_Str)

∆ITh : The floating threshold value

This element adopts adaptive floating threshold varied with the change of load currentcontinuously.
The change of load current is small and steadily under normal or power swingcondition, the
adaptive floating threshold with the ∆ISet is higher than the change of currentunderthese
conditions and hence maintains the element stability.

The coefficient, 1.25, is an empirical value which ensures the threshold always higher than
theunbalance output value of the system.

If operation condition is met, the fault detector based on superimposed current will operate to
provide DCpower supply for output relays, the pickup signal will maintain 7s after the fault detector
based onsuperimposed current drops off.

3.3.3.4 Fault Detector Based on Residual Current

In case of long distance fault or big resistance fault, superimposed current isrelative small, so,
residual current is used to judge pickup condition.

The operation condition will be met when 3I0 is greater than the setting FD_ResCur_Str. Thefault
detector based on residual current is always in service.

Where:

3I0: residual current calculates from the vector sum of Ia, Ib and Ic

If operation condition is met, the fault detector based on residual current will operate to provide
DCpower supply for output relay, and the pickup signal will maintain 7s after the fault detector
basedon residual current drops off.

3.3.3.5 Fault Detector Based on Negative-sequence Current

The operation condition will be met when I2 is greater than the setting FD_NegCur_Str. It can be
enabled or disabled by the logic setting FD_Neg_Ena.

Where:

46 PRS-778
Protection Functions

I2: negative-sequence current calculates from the vector of Ia, Ib and Ic

If operation condition is met, the fault detector based on negative-sequence current will operate to
provide DCpower supply for output relay, and the pickup signal will maintain 7s after the fault
detector basedon negative-sequence current drops off.

3.3.3.6 Logic

Figure 3.3.1 Logic Diagram for Fault Detector

3.3.3.7 Settings

Table 3.3- 4 Settings of fault detector

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description

Enabling/disabling negative-sequencecurrent
fault detector element
1 FD_Neg_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0
0: disable

1: enable

(0.04~0.5) Current setting of superimposed current fault


2 FD_SupCur_Str A 0.01 0.5
×In detector element

(0.04~30.00) Current setting of residual current fault detector


3 FD_ResCur_Str A 0.01 0.5
×In element

(0.04~30.00) Current setting of negative-sequence current


4 FD_NegCur_Str A 0.01 0.5
×In fault detector element

PRS-778 47
Protection Functions

3.3.4 Mho Distance Protection 21M


3.3.4.1 Function Block

3.3.4.2 Signals

Table 3.3- 5 21M Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ia,Ib,Ic Three-phase current input

2 Ua,Ub,Uc Three-phase voltage input

3 21Mx_PE_Blk Block signal of phase-to-earth 21M zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

4 21Mx_PP_Blk Block signal of phase-to-phase 21M zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

Blocking power swing blocking releasing of 21M zone x


5 21Mx_PSBR_Blk
(x=1,2,3,4,5)

Table 3.3- 6 21M Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 21Mx_Op Operation signal from zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

2 21Mx_Op_A Operation signal from phase A zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

3 21Mx_Op_B Operation signal from phase B zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

4 21Mx_Op_C Operation signal from phase C zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

5 21Mx_PE_Op Operation signal from phase-to-earth zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

6 21Mx_PP_Op Operation signal from phase-to-phase zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

3.3.4.3 Protection Principle

1. Phase-to-phase distance element

Phase-to-phase positive sequence voltage is used as polarized signal for phase-to-phasedistance


protection.

Operation voltage:Uopφφ = Uφφ - Iφφ × ZZD φφ = AB, BC, CA

48 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Polarized voltage:Upφφ = U1φφ ∠θ

Where:

ZZD : the impedance setting zone x of phase-to-phase distance protection, set by the
setting21Mx_PP_Imp_Op(x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Uφφ is the phase-to-phase voltage

U1φφ is the positive sequence voltage

Iφφ is the phase-to-phase current

Phase comparison equation is:

Upφφ
270° > arg > 90°
Uopφφ

In short line, phase shift θ could be applied to the polarized voltage to improve the
performanceagainst high resistance fault. The device provides an angle-shift setting,
21Mx_PP_Phi_Shift, toset value of θ among 0°, 15° and 30°

For the three-phase close up short-circuit fault, the positive sequence voltage is lower, and the
memorized positive sequence voltage is used.When the memory fades out, the
operationcharacteristic will be reverse offset a little to enclose the origin to ensure keeping
operating of distance protection until the fault being cleared. The phase comparison equation is:

Uφφ + 0.1 × Iφφ × ZZD


270° > arg > 90°
Uφφ − Iφφ × ZZD

PRS-778 49
Protection Functions

Figure 3.3.2 Phase-to-phase operation characteristic of mho distance protection

2. Phase-to- earth distance element

Operation criteria:

U1φ ∠
270° > arg > 90° φ = A, B, C
Uφ − Iφ + k × 3I0 × ZZD

Where:

ZZD : the impedance setting zone x of phase-to-ground distance protection, set by the
setting21Mx_PE_Imp_Op(x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Uφ is the phase voltage

Iφ is the phase current

U1φ is the positive sequence voltage

3I0 is the zero-sequencecurrent

k is zero-sequence compensation coefficient

In short line, phase shift θ could be applied to the polarized voltage to improve the
performanceagainst high resistance fault. The device provides an angle-shift setting,
21Mx_PE_Phi_Shift, toset value of θ among 0°, 15° and 30°

To improve the operation characteristics of phase-to-ground distance elementso as to allow them


to cover ground fault with high resistance. without overreach, the device adopts zero sequence
reactance relays to further solve the problem of overreach operation of phase-to-ground distance

50 PRS-778
Protection Functions

element. The operation criterion of zero sequence reactance relays is:

Uφ − Iφ + k × 3I0 × ZZD
360° > arg > 180°
Iφ + k × 3I0 ∠ − β

Where:

β: the angle of zero sequence compensation reactance, set by 21Mx_X0Comp_Ang.

The operation characteristics of above equation on impedance planes are a straight line at the set
impedance vector end, shown as figure3.3.3. In the operation criterion of zero sequence
reactance relays, I0phase moves backward forβ degree to appropriately limit its operation area to
improve safety.

Figure 3.3.3Phase-to-ground operation characteristic of mho distance protection

PRS-778 51
Protection Functions

3.3.4.4 Logic

Figure 3.3.2 Logic diagram of distance protection (Mho zone x)

Where:

x=1,2,3,4,5

21Mx_PE_relay means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-earth distanceprotection


is within the range determined by the setting 21Mx_PE_Imp_Op.

21Mx_PP_relay means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-phase distance


protectionis within the range determined by the setting 21Mx_PP_Imp_Op.

3.3.4.5 Settings

Table 3.3- 7 21M Settings

NO Name Range Unit Step Default Description

Direction option for zone x of distance


1 21Mx_Dir_Mod 0 or 1 - - 0
protection (x=1,2, 3, 4, 5)

52 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO Name Range Unit Step Default Description

0: Forward
1: Reverse

Enabling/disabling zone x of
phase-to-earth distance protection (x=1,
2 21Mx_PE_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable

Enabling/disabling zone x of
phase-to-phase distance protection (x=1,
3 21Mx_PP_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zone x of distance
protection controlled by PSBR (x=1, 2, 3,
4 21Mx_PSBR_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable

Phase shift of phase-to-earth distance


5 21Mx_PE_Phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 deg 15 0
protection for zone x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Zero sequence reactance compensation


6 21Mx_X0Comp_Ang 0~30 deg 0.01 12
angle

Impedance setting of zone x of


7 21Mx_PE_Imp_Op (0.05~500)/In ohm 0.01 8 phase-to-earth distance protection (x=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

Time delay of zone x of phase-to-earth


8 21Mx_PE_Op_T 0.000~10.000 s 0.001 10
distance protection (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Phase shift of phase-to-phase distance


9 21Mx_PP_Phi_Shift 0, 15 or 30 deg 15 0
protection for zone x (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Impedance setting of zone x of


10 21Mx_PP_Imp_Op (0.05~500)/In ohm 0.01 8 phase-to-phase distance protection (x=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

Time delay of zone x of phase-to-phase


11 21Mx_PP_Op_T 0.000~10.000 s 0.001 10
distance protection (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

PRS-778 53
Protection Functions

3.3.5 Quadrilateral Distance Protection 21Q


3.3.5.1 Function Block

3.3.5.2 Signals

Table 3.3- 8 21Q Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ia,Ib,Ic Three-phase current input

2 Ua,Ub,Uc Three-phase voltage input

3 21Qx_PE_Blk Block signal of phase-to-earth 21Q zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

4 21Qx_PP_Blk Block signal of phase-to-phase 21Q zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

Blocking power swing blocking releasing of 21Q zone x


5 21Qx_PSBR_Blk
(x=1,2,3,4,5)

Table 3.3- 9 1Q Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 21Qx_Op Operation signal from zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

2 21Qx_Op_A Operation signal from phase A zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

3 21Qx_Op_B Operation signal from phase B zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

4 21Qx_Op_C Operation signal from phase C zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

5 21Qx_PE_Op Operation signal from phase-to-earth zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

6 21Qx_PP_Op Operation signal from phase-to-phase zone x (x=1,2,3,4,5)

3.3.5.3 Protection Principle

Features available with quadrilateral distance protection include 5 settable forward or reverse
zones phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase distance element. Each zone can respectivelyenable or
disable power swing blocking releasing.

1) The reactance lineelement

Operation criteria:

phase-to-ground:

54 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Uφ − Iφ + k × 3I0 × ZZD
180° < arg < 360° φ = A, B, C
Iφ + k × 3I0 ∠ − δ

phase-to-phase:

Uφφ − Iφφ × ZZD


180° < arg < 360° φφ = AB, BC, CA
Iφφ ∠ − δ

Where:

ZZD : the impedance setting zone x of quadrilateral distance protection, set by the
setting21Qx_PE_Imp_Op OR 21Qx_PP_Imp_Op(x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Uφφ is the phase-to-phase voltage

Iφφ is the phase-to-phase current

Uφ is the phase voltage

Iφ is the phase current

3I0 is the zero-sequencecurrent

k is zero-sequence compensation coefficient

δ: the angle of zero sequence compensation reactance, set by 21Qx_X0Comp_Ang.

2) The directional lineelement

Operation criteria:

phase-to-ground:
Upφ
−α < arg < 90° +

phase-to-phase:

Upφφ
−α < arg < 90° +
Iφφ

Where:

Upφφ is the phase-to-phase polarized voltage

PRS-778 55
Protection Functions

Upφ is the phase polarized voltage

α: the angle of directional line, set by the setting 21Qx_Ang_Alpha(x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

β: the angle of directional line, set by the setting 21Qx_Ang_Beta(x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

3) The resistance lineelement

Operation criteria:

phase-to-ground:
Uφ − Iφ + k × 3I0 × RZD
φ < arg < 180° + φ
Iφ + k × 3I0

phase-to- phase:

Uφφ − Iφφ × RZD


φ < arg < 180° + φ
Iφφ

Where:

RZD : the resistance setting zone x of quadrilateral distance protection, set by the
setting21Qx_PE_R_Op OR 21Qx_PP_R_Op(x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

φ: line positive-sequence characteristic angle

Figure 3.3.5 Impedance characteristic of quadrilateral distance protection

56 PRS-778
Protection Functions

In the figure 3.3-5,the X elementcompletes the fault location,adopt the reactance lineelement,
characteristic is like X line, downward offset angle of the R axis; the D elementcompletes the
direction judgment,adopt the directional lineelement, characteristic is like D broken line; the R
elementreflect high-impedance-grounded faults,adopt the resistance lineelement, characteristic is
like R line.

3.3.5.4 Logic

Figure 3.3.6 Logic diagram of distance protection (Quad zone x)

Where:

x=1,2,3,4,5

21Qx_PE_relay means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-earth distanceprotection


is within the range determined by the setting 21Qx_PE_Imp_Op and 21Qx_PE_R_Op.

21Qx_PP_relay means that measured impedance by zone x of phase-to-phase distance


protectionis within the range determined by the setting 21Qx_PP_Imp_Op and 21Qx_PP_R_Op.

PRS-778 57
Protection Functions

3.3.5.5 Settings

Table 3.3- 10 21Q Settings

NO Name Range Unit Step Default Description

Direction option for zone x of distance


protection (x=1,2, 3, 4, 5)
1 21Qx_Dir_Mod 0 or 1 - - 0
0: Forward
1: Reverse

Enabling/disabling zone x of
phase-to-earth distance protection (x=1,
2 21Qx_PE_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable

Enabling/disabling zone x of
phase-to-phase distance protection (x=1,
3 21Qx_PP_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0 2, 3, 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling zone x of distance
protection controlled by PSBR (x=1, 2, 3,
4 21Qx_PSBR_Ena 0 or 1 - - 0 4, 5)
0: disable
1: enable

Angle of blinder in fourth quadrant


5 21Qx_Ang_Alpha 5~45 deg 0.01 25
forforward direction

Angle of blinder in second quadrant


6 21Qx_Ang_Beta 0~85 deg 0.01 30
forforward direction

Zero sequence reactance compensation


7 21Qx_X0Comp_Ang 0~30 deg 0.01 12
angle

Impedance setting of zone x of


8 21Qx_PE_Imp_Op (0.05~500)/In ohm 0.01 8 phase-to-earth distance protection (x=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

Resistance setting of zone x of


9 21Qx_PE_R_Op (0.05~500)/In ohm 0.01 20 phase-to-earth distance protection (x=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

Time delay of zone x of phase-to-earth


10 21Qx_PE_Op_T 0.000~10.000 s 0.001 10
distance protection (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

Impedance setting of zone x of


11 21Qx_PP_Imp_Op (0.05~500)/In ohm 0.01 8 phase-to-phase distance protection (x=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

12 21Qx_PP_R_Op (0.05~500)/In ohm 0.01 20 Resistance setting of zone x of

58 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO Name Range Unit Step Default Description


phase-to-phase distance protection (x=1,
2, 3, 4, 5)

Time delay of zone x of phase-to-phase


13 21Qx_PP_Op_T 0.000~10.000 s 0.001 10
distance protection (x=1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

3.3.6 Power Swing Blocking Releasing PSBR


3.3.6.1 Function Block

3.3.6.2 Signals

Table 3.3- 11 PSBR Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ia,Ib,Ic Three-phase current input

2 Ua,Ub,Uc Three-phase voltage input

Table 3.3- 12 PSBR Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 PSBR_Rls PSBR operates to release distance protection

3.3.6.3 Protection Principle

When power swing occurs on the power system, the impedance measured by the distance
measuring element may vary from the load impedance area into the operating zone of the
distance element. The distance measuring element may operate due to the power swing occurs in
many points of interconnected power systems. To keep the stability of whole power system,
tripping due to operation of the distance measuring element during a power swing is generally not
allowed. Our distance protection adopts power swing blocking releasing to avoid maloperation
resulting from power swing. In another word, distance protection is blocked all along under the
normal condition and power swing when the respective logic settings are enabled. Only when fault
(internal fault or power swing with internal fault) is detected, power swing blocking for distance
protection is released by PSBR element.

Power swing blocking for distance element will be released if any of the following PSBR elements
operates. Each distance zone elements has respective setting for selection this function.

1) Swing detector element (SD)

2) Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element (UF PSBR)

PRS-778 59
Protection Functions

3) Symmetrical fault PSBR element (SF PSBR)

1. Swing detector element

If the device picked up before swing condition is met, PSBR will operate for 160ms.

This detection is based on measuring the voltage at power swing center, during power swing,
swing condition is shown as below:

 0.7U N  U OS  0.7U N

U OS  1V

U 1  18V & U 2  3V & 3U 0  8V
3I  I _ Line & I  PSBR.I
 0 1

If operation condition is met, the swing detector will operate.

2. Unsymmetrical fault PSBR element

The operation criterion:

I0+I2>m×I1

The “m”, an empirical value, is internal fixed coefficient which can ensure operation during power
swing with internal unsymmetrical fault, while no operation during power swing.

3. Symmetrical fault PSBR element

This detection is based on measuring the voltage at power swing center, during power swing,
U1cosΦ will constantly change periodically.

UOS=U1×COSΦ

Where:

Φ: the angle between positive sequence voltage and current

U1: the positive sequence voltage

1) Releasing element 1

During power swing, power swing center voltage U1cosΦ has the following characteristics: When
electric potential phase angle difference between power supplies at two sides is 180o, U1cosΦ=0
and change rate dU1cosΦ/dt is the maximum. When this phase angle difference is near 0, power
swing center voltage change rate dU1cosΦ/dt is the minimum. During short circuit, U1cosΦ
remains unchanged and dU1cosΦ/dt=0.

2) Releasing element 2

For these reasons, the method to release distance protection on condition that power swing center
voltage U1cosΦ is less than a setting and after a short delay can be used as symmetric fault
discriminating element. This element can accurately differentiate power swing and 3-phase short
circuit fault, and constitute a complete power swing blocking scheme with other elements. The

60 PRS-778
Protection Functions

element to open distance protection if U1cosΦ is less than a certain setting and after a delay is
easy to realize and has short delay, and can trip fault more quickly and accurately trip 3-phase
short circuit fault during power swing.

 when -0.03UN<UOS<0.08UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 150ms.

 when -0.1UN<UOS<0.25UN, the SF PSBR element will operate after 500ms.

3) Releasing element 3

To reduce the time delay for SF PSBR element during power swing, the change rate of voltage at
power swing center is also used which can release SF PSBR element quickly for the fault occurred
during power swing. The typical release time is less than 60ms.

3.3.6.4 Logic

Figure 3.3.7 Logic diagram of PSBR

3.3.6.5 Settings

Table 3.3- 1 Settings of PSBR

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description

1 PSBR_Cur (0.05~30.00) ×In A 0.01 20 Current setting for power swing blocking

3.4 Directional Overcurrent Protection (67P/50/51)


3.4.1 Overview
The main and important function of Four stage phase overcurrent protection OC4_PTOC (67P) is
to continuously track the electrical power system current. For the point of view of continuously
power supply and minimum damage during fault condition (at the time of fault the normal current
value is increases suddenly and this current is too harmful for primary equipment’s). If the
detected or measured current value is greater than the set level, the Four stage phase overcurrent
protection OC4_PTOC (67P) will operates or gives alarm signal with dependable four stage
definite time delay (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) delay characteristics and each
stage have same logic of operation settings.

Notice!

PRS-778 61
Protection Functions

In case of both side feed transmission lines or ring power system the Phase overcurrent
protection ensure the more sensitive and precise operation with directional element. Direction
element define the operating angle (direction) range.

In addition, the 67P can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

62 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.4.1.1 Function Block

PRS-778 63
Protection Functions

3.4.1.2 Signals

Table 3.4- 167P Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Ia, Ib, Ic the three phase current.
2 Ua, Ub, Uc the three phase voltage
3 67P1_Blk Block signal of 67P stage1
4 67P2_Blk Block signal of 67P stage2
5 67P3_Blk Block signal of 67P stage3
6 67P4_Blk Block signal of 67P stage4

Table 3.4-2 67POutput Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 67P1_Str_A Start signal from phase A from 67Pstage1
2 67P1_Str_B Start signal from phase B from stage1
3 67P1_Str_C Start signal from phase C from stage1
4 67P1_Str Common start signal from stage1
5 67P1_Op_A Trip signal from stage1 phase A
6 67P1_Op_B Trip signal from stage1 phase B
7 67P1_Op_C Trip signal from stage1phase C
8 67P1_Op Trip signal from stage1
9 67P1_OPENVol Voltage open signal from stage1
10 67P1_OPENDir_A Directional open signal of phase A from stage1
11 67P1_OPENDir_B Directional open signal of phase B from stage1
12 67P1_OPENDir_C Directional open signal of phase C from stage1
13 67P2_Str_A Start signal from stage2 phase A
14 67P2_Str_B Start signal from stage2 phase B
15 67P2_Str_C Start signal from stage2 phase C
16 67P2_Str Common start signal from stage2
17 67P2_Op_A Trip signal from stage2 phase A
18 67P2_Op_B Trip signal from stage2 phase B
19 67P2_Op_C Trip signal from stage2phase C
20 67P2_Op Trip signal from stage2
21 67P2_OPENVol Voltage open signal from stage2
22 67P2_OPENDir_A Directional open signal of phase A from stage2
23 67P2_OPENDir_B Directional open signal of phase B from stage2
24 67P2_OPENDir_C Directional open signal of phase C from stage2
25 67P3_Str_A Start signal from stage3 phase A
26 67P3_Str_B Start signal from stage3 phase B
27 67P3_Str_C Start signal from stage3 phase C
28 67P3_Str Common start signal from stage3

64 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description


29 67P3_Op_A Trip signal from stage3 phase A
30 67P3_Op_B Trip signal from stage3 phase B
31 67P3_Op_C Trip signal from stage3phase C
32 67P3_Op Trip signal from stage3
33 67P3_OPENVol Voltage open signal from stage3
34 67P3_OPENDir_A Directional open signal of phase A from stage3
35 67P3_OPENDir_B Directional open signal of phase B from stage3
36 67P3_OPENDir_C Directional open signal of phase C from stage3
37 67P4_Str_A Start signal from stage4 phase A
38 67P4_Str_B Start signal from stage4 phase B
39 67P4_Str_C Start signal from stage4 phase C
40 67P4_Str Common start signal from stage4
41 67P4_Op_A Trip signal from stage4 phase A
42 67P4_Op_B Trip signal from stage4 phase B
43 67P4_Op_C Trip signal from stage4phase C
44 67P4_Op Trip signal from stage4
45 67P4_OPENVol Voltage open signal from stage4
46 67P4_OPENDir_A Directional open signal of phase A from stage4
47 67P4_OPENDir_B Directional open signal of phase B from stage4
48 67P4_OPENDir_C Directional open signal of phase C from stage4

3.4.2 Protection Principle

Phase overcurrent protection has following functions:

1) Four-stage phase overcurrent protection with independent logic, current and time delay
settings.

2) Four-stage can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic. The inverse-time


characteristic is selectable among IEC standard inverse-time characteristics.

3) Direction control element can be selected to control each stage phase overcurrent
protectionwith three options: no direction, forward direction and reverse direction

3.4.2.1 Phase Overcurrent Element

The operation criterion for each stage of overcurrent element is:

Iφ > 67Px_Cur_Str

Where:

Iφ is measured phase current.

67 _ _ is the current setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, or 4) of overcurrent element.

The measured current values are compared to the setoperation current value of the function

PRS-778 65
Protection Functions

(67 _ _ ). If the measured value exceeds the set 67 _ _ , the level detector reports
the exceeding of the value to the phase selection logic.

If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or
phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase information matches the
67 _ _ ℎ_ setting, the phase selection logic activates the output signal of
67 _ _ (n=A,B,C).

3.4.2.2 Direction Control Element

The directional operation can be selected with the 67 _ _ setting. The user can select
either "(Non-Dir)", "(Forward)" or "(Reverse)" operation. By setting the value of 67 _ _ to
"0", the non-directional operation is allowed when the directional information is invalid.

The 67 _ _ setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The value of


67 _ _ should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in the operating direction are
seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the opposite direction are seen in the non-operating
zone. The value of Characteristic angle depends on the network configuration

The cross-polarizing quantity is used to determine the fault direction(IaUbc/IbUca/IcUab).


The evaluation of the forward directionality is according to the equation:


I e j(RCA  90 )
 90(5 )  arg r  90(5 )
U
r
The evaluation of the backward directionality is according to the equation:


I e j(RCA  90 )
90(5 )  arg r  270(5 )
U
r

66 PRS-778
Protection Functions

5o is the max angle margin. and are the polarizing current and voltage. RCA is the Relay

characteristic angle.

The polarized voltage is available as long as the phase-phase voltage exceeds


12V.Ifthephase-phase voltage reduces to less than 12V, the device uses memory voltage as
polarized voltage.

If the polarized voltage is invalid, the direction elementendures until the phase current decreases
below the I_LINE(0.05In).

Table 3.4- 3 Direction description

Direction Current Polarized Voltage


Phase A Ia Ubc
Phase B Ib Uca
Phase C Ic Uab
Phase A - B Ia - Ib Ubc - Uca
Phase B - C Ib - Ic Uca - Uab
Phase C - A Ic - Ia Uab - Ubc

3.4.2.3 Second harmonic detecting element

For harmonic detecting element, the harmonic blocking mode can be selected through the setting
67Px_Hm2_Mod, it can support phase blocking, cross blocking, and maximum phase blocking.
The corresponding relationship is shown in the following table.

Table 3.4- 4Harmonic detecting element description

Harmonic blocking mode Harmonic blocking criterion

Phase A Phase B Phase C

1 Phase blocking Ia2nd /Ia1st> Ib2nd /Ib1st> Ic2nd /Ic1st>

2 Cross blocking (Ia2nd /Ia1st >) or (Ib2nd/Ib1st >) or (Ic2nd /Ic1st>)

3 Maximum phase blocking Max(Ia2nd,Ib2nd, Max(Ia2nd ,Ib2nd, Max(Ia2nd ,Ib2nd,


Ic2nd )/Ia1st> Ic2nd )/Ib1st> Ic2nd )/Ic1st>

When the fundamental current is greater than the setting 67P_Hm2_IRls, the correspondingphase
will be unblocked by harmonic control element.The logic of harmonic control element isshown in
Figure 3.4-1.

PRS-778 67
Protection Functions

Figure 3.4- 1 Logic Diagram for harmonic detecting element

Where:
Ia1st, Ib1st, Ic1st are the fundamental current.
Ia2nd, Ib2nd, Ic2nd are the secondary harmonic current.
Imax is the maximum phase current.

3.4.2.4 Characteristic Curve

All stages can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time characteristic.Inverse-time operating


characteristic is as follows.

Where:

Ip is current setting 67 _ _ .

Tp is time multiplier setting 67 _ _ .

αis a constant setting 67 _ ℎ .

is a constant setting67 _ .

is a constant setting 67 _ .

is measured phase current from line CT


IDMT Characteristic K α C Curve Type Selection
IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0.02 0 1 ■
IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 2 ■
IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 3 ■
IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 4 ■
IEC User inverse K α C 5 ■

The timer model is determined by the setting67 _ _ _ . The details are as follows.

When the 67 _ _ _ = 0 , the operation is activated after the operation timer has
reached the value set by 67 _ _ . If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly

68 PRS-778
Protection Functions

disappears before the operate delay is exceeded, the operation will reset.

When the 67 _ _ _ = 1~5 , the operation is activated after the operation timer has
reached the value set by IDMT curve. However, 67 _ _ _ defines the minimum desired
operate time for IDMT.If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before
the operate delay is exceeded, the operation will reset.

NOTICE!

The 67 _ _ _ setting should be used with great care because the operation time
is according to theIEC curve, but always at least the value of the 67 _ _ _
setting.

3.4.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.4- 2 Logic Diagram for 67P

3.4.4 Settings
Table 3.4-5 Settings of Four stagedirectional overcurrent protection

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description


1 67P1_Cur_Str 0.02In~20In A 0.01 20.00 Operating phase current level

PRS-778 69
Supervision

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description


for stage 1
Def time delay or add time
2 67P1_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 1
Stage 1 setting of blocking
3 67P1_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 70.00
voltage

Stage 1 setting of Negative


4 67P1_U2_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 20.00
voltage
1 out of 3 Number of phases required for
5 67P1_Str_Ph_Num 2 out of 3 - 1 3 op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
Relay characteristic angle
6 67P1_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 270.0
(RCA)
Directional mode:0-2 for
7 67P1_Dir_Mod. 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward" or
"Reverse"
Enabling/Disabling phase
overcurrent protection with
direction control element is
8 67P1_Dir_VTSBlk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
blocked by VT circuit failure
when VT circuit supervision is
enabled and VT circuit fails
Coefficient of second
9 67P1_K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection
current setting for inrush
10 67P1_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection
The option of harmonic
blocking mode:
11 67P1_Hm2_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 0:phase blocking
1:cross blocking
2: maximum phase blocking
Option of characteristic curve
12 67P1_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 0
for stage 1
Time multiplier for the inverse
13 67P1_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage 1

Minimum operate time for


14 67P1_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 1

constant α of
15 67P1_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67P Stage 1

70 PRS-778
Supervision

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

constant C of
16 67P1_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67P Stage 1

constant K of
17 67P1_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67P Stage 1

Stage 1 Operation setting of


18 67P1_Hm2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 harmonic detecting element
Enable/Disable

Stage 1 Operation setting of


19 67P1_Vol_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
voltage Enable/Disable

20 67P1_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation 0/ 1


Operating phase current level
21 67P2_Cur_Str 0.02In~20In A 0.01 20.00
for stage 2
Def time delay or add time
22 67P2_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 2
Stage 2 setting of blocking
23 67P2_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 70.00
voltage
Stage 2 setting of Negative
24 67P2_U2_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 20.00
voltage
1 out of 3 Number of phases required for
25 67P2_Str_Ph_Num 2 out of 3 - 1 3 op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
Relay characteristic angle
26 67P2_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 270.0
(RCA)
Directional mode:0-2 for
27 67P2_Dir_Mod. 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward" or
"Reverse"
Enabling/Disabling phase
overcurrent protection with
direction control element is
28 67P2_Dir_VTSBlk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
blocked by VT circuit failure
when VT circuit supervision is
enabled and VT circuit fails
Coefficient of second
29 67P2_K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection

30 67P2_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00 current setting for inrush

PRS-778 71
Supervision

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description


current detection

The option of harmonic


blocking mode:
31 67P2_Hm2_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 0:phase blocking
1:cross blocking
2: maximum phase blocking
Option of characteristic curve
32 67P2_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 0
for stage 2
Time multiplier for the inverse
33 67P2_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage 2
Minimum operate time for
34 67P2_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 2
constant α of
35 67P2_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67P Stage 2
constant C of
36 67P2_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67P Stage 2
constant K of
37 67P2_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67P Stage 2
Stage 2 Operation setting of
38 67P2_Hm2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 harmonic detecting element
Enable/Disable
Stage 2 Operation setting of
39 67P2_Vol_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
voltage Enable/Disable

40 67P2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation 0/ 1

Operating phase current level


41 67P3_Cur_Str 0.02In~20In A 0.01 20.00
for stage 3
Def time delay or add time
42 67P3_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 3
Stage 3 setting of blocking
43 67P3_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 70.00
voltage
Stage 3 setting of Negative
44 67P3_U2_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 20.00
voltage
1 out of 3 Number of phases required for
45 67P3_Str_Ph_Num 2 out of 3 - 1 3 op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
Relay characteristic angle
46 67P3_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 270.0
(RCA)
Directional mode:0-2 for
47 67P3_Dir_Mod. 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward" or
"Reverse"

72 PRS-778
Supervision

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description


Enabling/Disabling phase
overcurrent protection with
direction control element is
48 67P3_Dir_VTSBlk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
blocked by VT circuit failure
when VT circuit supervision is
enabled and VT circuit fails
Coefficient of second
49 67P3_K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection
current setting for inrush
50 67P3_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection
The option of harmonic
blocking mode:
51 67P3_Hm2_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 0:phase blocking
1:cross blocking
2: maximum phase blocking
Option of characteristic curve
52 67P3_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 0
for stage 3
Time multiplier for the inverse
53 67P3_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage 3
Minimum operate time for
54 67P3_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 3
constant α of
55 67P3_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67P Stage 3
constant C of
56 67P3_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67P Stage 3
constant K of
57 67P3_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67P Stage 3
Stage 3 Operation setting of
58 67P3_Hm2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 harmonic detecting element
Enable/Disable
Stage 3 Operation setting of
59 67P3_Vol_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
voltage Enable/Disable

60 67P3_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation 0/ 1

Operating phase current level


61 67P4_Cur_Str 0.02In~20In A 0.01 20.00
for stage 4
Def time delay or add time
62 67P4_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 4
Stage 4 setting of blocking
63 67P4_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 70.00
voltage

PRS-778 73
Supervision

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description


Stage4 setting of Negative
64 67P4_U2_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.01 20.00
voltage
1 out of 3 Number of phases required for
65 67P4_Str_Ph_Num 2 out of 3 - 1 3 op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
Relay characteristic angle
66 67P4_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 270.0
(RCA)
Directional mode:0-2 for
67 67P4_Dir_Mod. 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward" or
"Reverse"
Enabling/Disabling phase
overcurrent protection with
direction control element is
68 67P4_Dir_VTSBlk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
blocked by VT circuit failure
when VT circuit supervision is
enabled and VT circuit fails
Coefficient of second
69 67P4_K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection
current setting for inrush
70 67P4_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection
The option of harmonic
blocking mode:
71 67P4_Hm2_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 0:phase blocking
1:cross blocking
2: maximum phase blocking
Option of characteristic curve
72 67P4_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 0
for stage 4
Time multiplier for the inverse
73 67P4_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage 4
Minimum operate time for
74 67P4_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 4
constant α of
75 67P4_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67P Stage 4
constant C of
76 67P4_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67P Stage 4
constant K of
77 67P4_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67P Stage 4
Stage 4 Operation setting of
78 67P4_Hm2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 harmonic detecting element
Enable/Disable

74 PRS-778
Protection Functions

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description


Stage 4 Operation setting of
79 67P4_Vol_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
voltage Enable/Disable

80 67P4_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation 0/ 1

3.5 Thermal Overload Protection (49)


3.5.1 Overview
The relay incorporates a current based thermal calculation, using load current to model heating
andcooling of the protected plant.The heat generated within an item of the plant, such as a cable
or a transformer, is the resistiveloss. Thus, heating is directly proportional to current squared. The
thermal timecharacteristic used in the relay is therefore based on current squared, integrated over
time. Therelay automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal calculation.

Equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full


loadrating, where heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated by radiation etc.If the
temperature of the protected object reaches the warning level, the alarm signal is given out. If the
temperature continues to increase to the maximum allowed temperature value, the protection
issues a trip signal to the protected line.

In addition, the 49 can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

3.5.1.1 Function Block

The function block of the protection is as below.

Figure 3.5- 1 Function block

3.5.1.2 Signals

Table 3.5- 1 VTS Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Ia,Ib,Ic The current in all the three phases
2 49_Clr_Therm The input signal of clearing therm
3 49_Str The start signal

PRS-778 75
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description


4 49_Op The operate signal
5 49_Alm The alarm signal

3.5.2 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.5- 2 Functional module diagram

3.5.3 Protection Principle


The thermal overload protection function has two stages: one for alarm and two for tripping, which
can be enabled or disabled by setting the corresponding 49_ _ and 49_ _ parameter
values as "1" or "0".

The operation of three-phase thermal protection can be described by using a module diagram. All
the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.

The function continuously checks the highest measured phase current valueand reports the
highest value to the temperature estimator.

The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents according to
the expression(the 1st ~ 7th harmonics of the phase current is taken into account):

t t
I 2  
t 1  ( ) (1  e  )  t  e 
k  IB

RMS value of the max fault phase current (the 1st ~ 7th harmonics of the phase current is
taken into account).

set value of49_ _ .

the rated current.

the set value of 49_ _ .

t is the initial thermal state, if the initial thermal state is 30%, the t is 0.3. t is calculated

from the following equation: IP 2 = Θt ∙ (k ∙ IB )2 . For the heat rising process, Ip is the previous
current 100ms before the heat first rises; for the cooling process, the Ip is the trip current.

t 1 The trip or alarm thermal state: Trip (the setting value 49_ _ ) or Alarm (the

76 PRS-778
Protection Functions

setting49_ _ ). For cooling process, the t 1 is the return value.

When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level 49_ _ , the output signal
49_ is issued. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level 49_ _ , the
49_ output is activated.

There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current. This is only
calculated if the final temperature is calculated to be above the operation temperature.

The time to operate can be calculated as:

I 2  t (k  I B ) 2
t    ln
I 2  t 1 (k  I B )2

The time to lockout release is calculated, that is, the calculation of the cooling time to a set value.
The calculated temperature can be reset to its initial value via a control parameter that is located
under the clear menu.

The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the initial temperature. This is
done in case the IED is powered up, the function is turned off and back on or reset through the
49_ _ ℎ input.
2
The function is cold turned on before 10 min of the IED powered up. If ∗ is more than
the set value of 49_ _ , the 49_ output is activated.

The temperature is also stored in the nonvolatile memory and restored in case the IED is
restarted.

3.5.4 Settings
Table 3.5- 2 settings of Three-phase thermal overload protection

No. Name Values(Range) Unit Step Default Description


1 49_Rated_Cur 0.02In~3In A 0.01 1.00 Rated current
2 49_T_Mult 1~6000 s 1 600 Time multiplier
3 49_K_Factor 1.00~5.00 - 0.01 1.05 Temperature factor
Temperature level for
4 49_K_Trp 50~200 % 1 100
tripping
Temperature level for
5 49_K_Alm 0~100 % 1 90
alarm
Trip function
6 49_Trp_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
disable/enable
Alarm function
7 49_Alm_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
disable/enable

PRS-778 77
Protection Functions

3.6 Earth Fault Protection (67N/50/51N)


3.6.1 Overview
In electrical power industry, earth fault protection (67N) is very important and need to detect very
accurate earth fault value and clear this fault as soon as possible. When earth fault is happening in
the power system, according to ohm law current always follow the low resistive path and all current
goes into the grounding system and it’s a main reason to increase the current level of
zero-sequence current.

Earth fault protection (67N) is operation based on zero-sequence current. If the detection level of
zero-sequence current is greater than set value, the earth fault protection will operate and protect
the system.

In addition, the 67N can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

3.6.1.1 Function Block

3.6.1.2 Signals

Table 3.6- 167N Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Ia, Ib, Ic the three phase current.
2 Ua, Ub, Uc the three phase voltage
3 3I0 The Measured neutral current

78 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description


4 67N1_Blk Block signal of 67N stage1
5 67N2_Blk Block signal of 67N stage2
6 67N3_Blk Block signal of 67N stage3
7 67N4_Blk Block signal of 67N stage4

Table 3.6- 267N Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 67N1_Str start signal from stage1
2 67N1_Op Operation signal from stage1
3 67N1_OPENHm2 Voltage open signal from stage1
4 67N1_OPENDir Directional open signal from stage1
5 67N2_Str start signal from stage2
6 67N2_Op Operation signal from stage2
7 67N2_OPENHm2 Voltage open signal from stage2
8 67N2_OPENDir Directional open signal from stage2
9 67N3_Str start signal from stage3
10 67N3_Op Operation signal from stage3
11 67N3_OPENHm2 Voltage open signal from stage3
12 67N3_OPENDir Directional open signal from stage3
13 67N4_Str start signal from stage4
14 67N4_Op Operation signal from stage4
15 67N4_OPENHm2 Voltage open signal from stage4
16 67N4_OPENDir Directional open signal from stage4

3.6.2 Protection Principle


The earth fault protection includesfour stages of zero sequence overcurrent protection with
independent logic function and settings. Each stage can be selected as definite time or inverse
time characteristic as required. All IEC standard inverse time characteristics curves are optional.
Direction control element can be used to block each stage earth fault protection independently,
when the directionality of the fault current should be considered. There are three settable options:
no direction, forward direction and reverse direction. The base value, zero sequence current, is
selectable. Therefore, both of the externally sampling neutral current and internally calculated
residual current can be used as the base value based on the practical situation.

3.6.2.1 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element

The operation criterion for each stage of earth fault protection can be expressed as below:

3I0 > 67 _ _

Where:

3I0 is the calculated residual current.or the sampling neutral current

PRS-778 79
Protection Functions

67 _ _ is the zero sequence current setting of stage x (x=1, 2, 3, or 4) of earth fault


protection

If the sampling residual current is available for the protection function, that is there is a external
residual current wired from the neutral point, the residual current can be used as the operation
quantity for the EF protection. Otherwise the internally calculated residual current from the three
phase currents will be used instead. The operating quantity is compared to the set67 _ _ . If
the operating quantity exceeds the set, the start signal will be activated and the timer element will
start count the time.

3.6.2.2 Zero-sequence Current Direction Control Element

The directionality of the operation can be selected with the 67 _ _ setting. Three options,
"Non-directional", "Forward" or "Reverse", are optional for the practical situation.

Self-polarizing is used (I0-(-U0)) to determine the fault direction.

The forward directionality is evaluatedbased on the below equation:

Ir e j
 90  arg
0
 90 0
- Ur

The reverse directionality is evaluated based on the below equation:

Ir e j
900  arg  270 0
- Ur

I 0 and U 0 are the current and voltage of the Self-polarizing. RCA means the characteristic angle.

3.6.2.3 Second harmonic detecting element

The ratio of second harmonic in three-phase current or measured neutral current to fundamental

80 PRS-778
Protection Functions

harmonic is taken as criterion for blocking of 67N, and the operating formula is given as below:

2 > 67N_K_Hm2 ∗ 1

Where:

2 means second harmonic in three-phase current or measured neutral current;

1 represents fundamental harmonic of three-phase current or measured neutral current at


corresponding phase;

67Nx_K_Hm2 is second harmonic restraint coefficient.

When the fundamental current is greater than the setting 67Nx_Hm2_IRls, the correspondingphase
will be unblocked by harmonic control element.

3.6.2.4 Characteristic Curve

Eachstagecan be selected as definite time or inverse time characteristic depending on the


practical demand.

The inverse time calculating eqation is listed as follows.

Where:

is current setting67 _ _ .

is time multiplier setting67 _ _ .

αis a constant setting67 _ ℎ .

is a constant setting67 _ .

is a constant setting 67 _ .

3I0is the operating quantity, the selected neutral current or calculated residual current.

IDMT Characteristic K α C Curve Type Selection


IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0.02 0 1 ■
IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 2 ■
IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 3 ■
IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 4 ■
IEC User inverse K α C 5 ■

The timer model can be selected by modifying the setting 67 _ _ _ .

When the 67 _ _ _ = 0 , the operation is activated after the operation timer element
has reached the value set by 67 _ _ . If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly

PRS-778 81
Protection Functions

disappears and the fault current drop lower than the current setting, before the operate delay is
exceeded, the operation will reset.

When the 67 _ _ _ = 1~5 , the operation is activated after the operation timer has
reached the value determined by the IDMT curve. However, 67 _ _ _ limits the minimum
possible operate time under IDMT mode, that is, the operation time should not be less than the
67 _ _ _ . If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the
operate delay is exceeded, the operation will reset.

NOTICE!

The 67 _ _ _ setting should be setvery cautiously because at least the


operating time should exceed the 67 _ _ _ setting even though the operation
time is calculated according to the IDMT curve.

3.6.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.6- 1 Logic Diagram for 67N

3.6.4 Settings
Table 3.6- 3 Settings of earth fault protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)

82 PRS-778
Supervision

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Operating current level for
1 67N1_Cur_Str 0.02In~20.00In A 0.01 20.00
stage 1
Def time delay or add time
2 67N1_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 1

Relay characteristic angle


3 67N1_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 90.0
(RCA)

Directional mode:0-2 for


4 67N1_Dir_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward"
or "Reverse"
Coefficient of second
5 67N1 _K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection

current setting for inrush


6 67N1_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection

Option of characteristic
7 67N1_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 1
curve for stage 1

Time multiplier for the


8 67N1_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 inverse time delay
for stage 1

Minimum operate time for


9 67N1_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 1

constant α of
10 67N1_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67N Stage 1

constant C of
11 67N1_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67N Stage 1

constant K of
12 67N1_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67N Stage 1

Enable second
harmonicsdetection:1
13 67N1_ Hm2_Ena 0/1 - - 0
Disable second
harmonicsdetection:0
Zero-sequence current
comes fromthree-phase
14 67N1_ZC_Ena 0/1 - - 0 current : 1
Zero-sequence current from
the external : 0

PRS-778 83
Supervision

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)

15 67N1_Ena 0/1 - - 0 Operation 0/ 1

Operating current level for


16 67N2_Cur_Str 0.02In~20.00In A 0.01 20.00
stage 2

Def time delay or add time


17 67N2_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 2

Relay characteristic angle


18 67N2_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 90.0
(RCA)

Directional mode:0-2 for


19 67N2_Dir_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward"
or "Reverse"
Coefficient of second
20 67N2 _K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection

current setting for inrush


21 67N2_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection

Option of characteristic
22 67N2_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 1
curve for stage 2

Time multiplier for the


23 67N2_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 inverse time delay
for stage 2

Minimum operate time for


24 67N2_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 2

constant α of
25 67N2_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67N Stage 2

constant C of
26 67N2_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67N Stage 2

constant K of
27 67N2_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67N Stage 2

Enable second
harmonicsdetection:1
28 67N2_ Hm2_Ena 0/1 - - 0
Disable second
harmonicsdetection:0

84 PRS-778
Supervision

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Zero-sequence current
comes fromthree-phase
29 67N2_ZC_Ena 0/1 - - 0 current : 1
Zero-sequence current from
the external : 0

30 67N2_Ena 0/1 - - 0 Operation 0/ 1

Operating current level for


31 67N3_Cur_Str 0.02In~20.00In A 0.01 20.00
stage 3
Def time delay or add time
32 67N3_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 3
Relay characteristic angle
33 67N3_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 90.0
(RCA)
Directional mode:0-2 for
34 67N3_Dir_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward"
or "Reverse"
Coefficient of second
35 67N3 _K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection
current setting for inrush
36 67N3_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection
Option of characteristic
37 67N3_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 1
curve for stage 3
Time multiplier for the
38 67N3_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 inverse time delay
for stage 3
Minimum operate time for
39 67N3_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 3
constant α of
40 67N3_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67N Stage 3
constant C of
41 67N3_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67N Stage 3
constant K of
42 67N3_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67N Stage 3
Enable second
harmonicsdetection:1
43 67N3_ Hm2_Ena 0/1 - - 0
Disable second
harmonicsdetection:0

PRS-778 85
Supervision

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Zero-sequence current
comes fromthree-phase
44 67N3_ZC_Ena 0/1 - - 0 current : 1
Zero-sequence current from
the external : 0

45 67N3_Ena 0/1 - - 0 Operation 0/ 1

Operating current level for


46 67N4_Cur_Str 0.02In~20.00In A 0.01 20.00
stage 4
Def time delay or add time
47 67N4_Op_T 0.020~100.000 s 0.001 10.000 delay for
inverse char of stage 4
Relay characteristic angle
48 67N4_Ang_RCA 0.0~360.0 Deg 0.1 90.0
(RCA)
Directional mode:0-2 for
49 67N4_Dir_Mod 0~2 - 1 0 "Non-directional", "Forward"
or "Reverse"
Coefficient of second
50 67N4_K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.10 harmonics for inrush current
detection
current setting for inrush
51 67N4_Hm2_IRls 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
current detection
Option of characteristic
52 67N4_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - 1 1
curve for stage 4
Time multiplier for the
53 67N4_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 inverse time delay
for stage 4
Minimum operate time for
54 67N4_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 4
constant α of
55 67N4_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
67N Stage 4
constant C of
56 67N4_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
67N Stage 4
constant K of
57 67N4_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
67N Stage 4
Enable second
harmonicsdetection:1
58 67N4_ Hm2_Ena 0/1 - - 0
Disable second
harmonicsdetection:0
Zero-sequence current
59 67N4_ZC_Ena 0/1 - - 0
comes fromthree-phase

86 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
current : 1
Zero-sequence current from
the external : 0

60 67N4_Ena 0/1 - - 0 Operation 0/ 1

3.7 Restricted Earth Fault Protection (64REF)


3.7.1 Overview
The single-phase or two-phase grounding fault with high resistance occurs when the load of the
transformer is low, and the sensitivity of the Transformer differential protection(87T) is limited.
Therefore, the restricted Earth Fault protection (64REF) is set as the main protection for
single-phase and two-phase grounding fault in the area.The operation calculation of limited earth
fault protection (64REF) is based on differential current and limited current.

 The vector sum calculated by the zero sequence current external to the neutral point and the
zero sequence current generated by the switch CT is the differential current.

 The maximum value of the zero sequence current external to the neutral point and the zero
sequence current generated by the switch CT is the protective braking current

When the internal fault is happening in the winding of power transformer and the total earth fault
current is equal to the deference of current. To increase the high operated accuracy of Restricted
Earth Fault Protection (64REF) is dependently operate only fault current without any interference
of load current. When an internal fault occurs in a power transformer winding, the total ground fault
current is equal to the difference of zero sequence current.Limited ground fault protection (64REF)
only depends on fault current and will not be affected by load current, so the operation speed will
be greatly improved.

This protection can be configured using any type of transformer, such as two - winding, three -
winding, autotransformer.In addition, 64REF can be configured on the high voltage side, middle
voltage side or low voltage side of the transformer.

PRS-778 87
Protection Functions

3.7.1.1 Function Block

3.7.1.2 Signals

Table 3.7- 164REF Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Id0 Differential current of 64REF
2 64REF_Blk Block signal of 64REF

Table 3.7- 264REF Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 64REF_Str Start signal from 64REF
2 64REF_Op Operation signal from 64REF
3 64REF_CT_Satu CT Saturation signal from 64REF
4 64REF_CT_Fail CT fail singal from 64REF
5 64REF_I0Neu I0>B0×I Signal from 64REF

3.7.2 Protection Principle

3.7.2.1 Fault Detector

REF's pickup criterion is:

I0d  64REF _ Cur _ Str

Where:

I 0 d is the residual differential current of some side.

3.7.2.2 Amplitude Compensation

If CTs used for REF have different primary rated values, the device will automatically adjust the
currents with respective correction ratio shown as below.

88 PRS-778
Protection Functions

KTA X
Klph X 
KTAH

Where:

KTAX primary side sampled zero-seq CT ratio.

KTAH primary side CT ratio. Primary side is reference and Kp is 1.

Transformer balance factor is calculated by this formula. When compensation, multiply current and
Kp.

3.7.2.3 Calculate Differential and Restraint Current

REF differential current and restraint current are calculated as the following formulas :

I 0d  I0Cal  I0 Neu


I 0r  max I0Cal , I0Neu 
Where:

I0d is the REF differential current;

I0r is the residual restraint current;

I0Cal is the residualcurrent of the phase currents;

I0Neu is the neutral measured current;

Figure 3.7- 1 REF principle diagram

PRS-778 89
Protection Functions

3.7.2.4 Operation Criterion

The operation criteria of REF protection are as follows:

I 0d  I 0cdqd

I 0d  K * I 0 r

I 0 Neu  I 0cdqd / 4

Where:

、  are respectively residualcurrent of the


I 0d  I0 C a l  I0 N e u   
, I0r  max I0Cal , I0Neu . I 0Cal I 0 Neu

phase currentsand neutral measuredcurrent.For this device, the ratio restrainted coefficient
fixedly takes 0.6.

3.7.2.5 Operation Characteristic

Figure 3.7- 2 Operation characteristic of REF

Where:

Id is the differential current;Ir is the restraint current;64REF_Cur_Str is the start of differential


current.

3.7.2.6 CT Transient Characteristic Difference Detection

To prevent the effect of incorrect differential circuit zero-sequence current on DIFF_REF in case of
CT transient characteristic difference and CT saturation induced by external faults, the device
integrates CT saturation criterion with positive-sequence current restraint at each side. When
DIFF_REF protection trips, zero-sequence current at each side must fulfill the following formula.

3I0  B0  I1

90 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Where:

3I is the zero-sequence current at a side.


0

I 1 is its corresponding positive-sequence current.

B0is a proportional constant and the value is 0.6.

3.7.2.7 CT Saturation Detection

Please refer to Section 3.2.2.9 for details.

3.7.2.8 CT Circuit Failure

Please refer to Section 3.2.2.12 for details.

3.7.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.7- 3 Logic diagram of restricted earth fault protection

Where:

I0neu is the neutral measured residual current

3.7.4 Settings
Table 3.7- 3 Settings of restricted earth fault protection

PRS-778 91
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)

1 64REF_Cur_Str 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 0.40 Pickup setting of REF

2 64REF_Cur_Alm 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00 Alm setting of REF


Percentage restraint
3 64REF_Slope 0~0.9 - 0.01 0.6 coefficient of REF
0.5 is recommended.
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling REF
4 64REF_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling
5 64REF_Alm_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 REF_Alm
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling neutral
6 64REF_NPCur_Ena 0/1 - 1 1 current criterion
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling block
biased differential element
7 64REF_CTS_Blk_Ena 0,1 1 0
during CT circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable

3.8 Winding Differential Protection (87W/N)


3.8.1 Overview
When each side and common winding of auto-transformer are installed with three phase CTs,
winding differential protection can be equipped. Winding differential protection is based on
Kirchhoff's law, so inrush current has no effect on it. Winding differential protection consists of
phase winding differential protection(87W) and residual winding differential protection(87N).
Residual winding differential protection adopts the calculated residual current of each side and
common winding for the protection calculation and three-phase CT polarity is easy to be checked.
The operation principle of which is similar to that of REF, but compared to REF, winding differential
protection can operate not only during internal earth faults but also during phase-to-phase faults.

92 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.8.1.1 Function Block

3.8.1.2 Signals

Table 3.8- 1 87W Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ida, Idb, Idc Three phase winding differential current from 87W
2 3Id0 Residual winding differential current from 87N
3 87W_Blk Block signal of 87W

4 87N_Blk Block signal of 87N

Table 3.8- 2 87W Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

19 87W_Str Start signal of differential from 87W

20 87W_Str_A Start_A signal of differential from 87W

21 87W_Str_B Start_B signal of differential from 87W

22 87W_Str_C Start_C signal of differential from 87W

23 87W_Op Operation signal of differential from 87W

24 87W_Op_A Operation_A signal of differential from 87W

25 87W_Op_B Operation_B signal of differential from 87W

26 87W_Op_C Operation_C signal of differential from 87W

27 87N_Str Start signal of differential from 87N

28 87N_Op Operation signal of differential from 87N

PRS-778 93
Protection Functions

3.8.2 Protection Principle

3.8.2.1 Fault Detector

87W/87N's pickup criterion is:

> 87 /87 _ _

Where:

is the winding differential current.

3.8.2.2 Amplitude Compensation

If CTs used for 87W have different primary rated values, the device will automatically adjust the
currents with respective correction ratio shown as below.

KTA X
Klph X 
KTAH

Where:

KTAX primary side sampled CT ratio.

KTAH primary side CT ratio. Primary side is reference and Kp is 1.

Transformer balance factor is calculated by this formula. When compensation, multiply current and
Kp.

3.8.2.3 Calculate Differential and Restraint Current

Winding differential current and restraint current are calculated as the following formulas :

The differential current is as follows.

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
= wph1 ∙ + wph2 ∙ + wph3 ∙ + wph4 ∙ + wph5 ∙ + wph6 ∙
1 2 3 4 5 6
0 01 02 03 04 05 06

' ' ' ' ' '


= 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6

' ' ' ' ' '


= 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6

' ' ' ' ' '


= 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6

' ' ' ' ' '


0 = 01 + 02 + 03 + 04 + 05 + 06

The restraint current is:


' ' ' ' ' '
= 1 、 2 、 3 、 4 、 5 、 6

94 PRS-778
Protection Functions

' ' ' ' ' '


= 1 、 2 、 3 、 4 、 5 、 6

' ' ' ' ' '


= 1 、 2 、 3 、 4 、 5 、 6

' ' ' ' ' '


0 = 01 、 02 、 03 、 04 、 05 、 06

Where:

、 、 、 0 are respectively three phase and residual winding differential currents.

、 、 、 0 are secondary values of three phase restraint currents and residual


restraint current respectively.

、 、 、0 are respectively secondary values of three phase currents and


calculated neutral current of branch m (m=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).
'
、 ' 、 ' 、 '0 are respectively secondary values of corrected three phase currents and
calculated residual current of branch m (m=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6).

wphm is corrected coefficient of each side for magnitude compensation respectively (m=1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6).

3.8.2.4 Operation Criterion

The operation criteria of winding differential protection are as follows:

> 87 /87 _ _
> ∗ 87 /87 _

Where:

is the winding differential current.

is the winding restraint current.

PRS-778 95
Protection Functions

3.8.2.5 Operation Characteristic

Figure 3.8 - 1 Operation characteristic of winding differential protection

Where:

is the winding differential current.

is the winding restraint current.

87 /87 _ _ is the start of differential current.

3.8.2.6 CT Transient Characteristic Difference Detection

To prevent the effect of incorrect differential circuit zero-sequence current on 87N in case of CT
transient characteristic difference and CT saturation induced by external faults, the device
integrates CT saturation criterion with positive-sequence current restraint at each side. When 87N
protection trips, zero-sequence current at each side must fulfill the following formula.

3 0 > 0 ∗ 1

Where:

3 0 is the zero-sequence current at a side.

1 is its corresponding positive-sequence current.

0 is a proportional constant and the value is 0.6.

3.8.2.7 CT Saturation Detection

Please refer to Section 3.2.2.9 for details.

96 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.8.2.8 CT Circuit Failure

Please refer to Section 3.2.2.12 for details.

3.8.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.8- 2 Logic diagram of winding differential protection

PRS-778 97
Protection Functions

3.8.4 Settings
Table 3.8- 3 Settings of winding differential protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Pickup setting of winding
1 87W/87N_Cur_Str 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 0.40
differential protection
Alm setting of winding
2 87W/87N_Cur_Alm 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00
differential protection
Percentage restraint
coefficient of winding
3 87W/87N_Slope 0~0.9 - 0.01 0.6
differential protection
0.6 is recommended.
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling phase
winding differential
4 87W_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
protection
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling residual
winding differential
87N_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
protection
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling
5 87W_Alam_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 87W_Alm
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling
6 87N_Alam_Ena 0/1 - 1 1 87N_Alm
0: disable
1: enable
Zero-sequence current
comes fromthree-phase
7 87N_IG0_Ena 0/1 - 1 1 current : 0
Zero-sequence current from
the external : 1
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling neutral
8 87N _NPCur_Ena 0/1 - 1 1
current criterion
0: disable

98 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling block
biased differential element
9 87W/87N_CTS_Blk_Ena 0,1 - 1 0
during CT circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable

3.9 Non-directional Instantaneous Earth Fault Protection(50N)


3.9.1 Overview
The main purpose of Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection 50N is to continuously monitor
the protected network residual current with the combination of zero-sequence instrument
transformer (CT). If any kind of trouble happen in protected electrical circuit likes open or short
circuit, it’s bring some type of disturbances. These disturbances will change the value of grounding
impedance. If the detected value of restrain current is larger than set value of restrain current the
protection will operate instantaneously.

In this protection have the capability of current multiplication factor for use only transformer inrush
condition. This protection provides two stage controlling setting with definite time delay (DT) or
IDMT time delay and also provide blocking function in case if CT trouble.

In addition, the 50N can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

3.9.1.1 Function Block

3.9.1.2 Signals

Table 3.9- 1 50N Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

PRS-778 99
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description

4 Ia, Ib, Ic the three phase current.

5 3I0 The Measured neutral current

6 50N_Blk Block signal of 50N

Table 3.8-2 50NOutput Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 50N_Str Common start signal from 50N

2 50N_Op Operation signal from50N

3.9.2 Protection Principle

3.9.2.1 Zero-sequence Overcurrent Element

The operation criterion for earth fault protection is:


3I0 > 50 _ _

Where:

3I0 is the calculated residual current.Or the measured neutral current


50 _ _ is the current setting of earth fault protection

If the measured residual current is configured to be available for the protection function it will be
used as operating quantity. Otherwise the internally calculated residual current is used. The
operating quantity is compared to the set 50 _ _ . If the measured value exceeds the set
50 _ _ , the level detector sends an enable-signal to the timer module.

3.9.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.9- 1 Logic Diagram for 50N

100 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.9.4 Settings
Table 3.9- 3 Settings of earth fault protection

No. Name Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description

1 50N_Cur_Str 0.02In~20In A 0.01 20.00 Current setting of 50N


Coefficient of second harmonics
2 50N_H_K_Hm2 0.00~1.00 - 0.01 0.1
for inrush current detection
50N_H_Hm2_I current setting for inrush current
3 2.00~30.00 A 0.01 20.00
Rls detection
Enable second
50N_H_Hm2_E harmonicsdetection:1
4 0/1 - - 0
na Disable second
harmonicsdetection:0
Zero-sequence current comes
fromthree-phase current : 1
5 50N_ZC_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
Zero-sequence current from the
external : 0

Enabling/disabling of 50N
6 50N_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 0: disable
1: enable

3.10 Breaker Failure Protection (50BF)


3.10.1 Overview
Breaker failure protection is applied to inter-trip each side of transformer when initiation signals of
breaker failure protection from busbar protection or other device are received. When the binary
input of external tripping is energized and current element picks up, a trip command will be issued
with a time delay to trip circuit breakers at each side of transformer. the 50BF can be configured on
the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage side of the transformer as a backup
protection for each side.

PRS-778 101
Protection Functions

3.10.1.1 Function Block

3.10.1.2 Signals

Table 3.10- 1 50BFInput Signals

NO. Signal Description

7 Ia, Ib, Ic the three phase current.

8 50BF_KI Input signal of 50BF

9 50BF_Blk Block signal of 50BF

Table 3.9-2 50BF Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

3 50BF_Alm Alarm signal from 50BF

4 50BF_Op Operation signal from 50BF

3.10.2 Protection Principle


The device provides four kinds of current criteria including phase current criterion, zero-sequence
current criterion, negative-sequence current criterion and DPFC current criterion. If any current
criterion is satisfied, current element of breaker failure protection picks up.

1. Phase current criterion


> 50BF_ Cur_I_Str

Where:

is the maximum value of three phase-current of some side.


2. Zero-sequence current criterion
3I0 > 50BF_ Cur_I0_Str

Where:

102 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3I0 is three times calculated zero-sequence current of some side.


3. Negative-sequence current criterion

2 > 50BF_Cur_I2_Str

Where:

2 is negative-sequence current of some side.


4. DPFC current criteria
∆ >∆

Where:

∆ is the floating threshold value which will arise automatically and gradually according to

increasing of the output of deviation component.

∆ is the fixed threshold and does not need to be set on site.

3.10.3 Logic Diagram

3.10.4 Settings
No. Item Range Unit Step Default Description
1 50BF_ Cur_I_Str 0.04In~20In A 0.01 20.00 Operating phase current level

Operating zero-sequence current


2 50BF_ Cur_I0_Str 0.04In~20In A 0.01 20.00
level

Operating Negative-sequence
3 50BF_Cur_I2_Str 0.04In~20In A 0.01 20.00
current level

PRS-778 103
Protection Functions

No. Item Range Unit Step Default Description

4 50BF_Op_T 0.00~10.00 s 0.01 10.00 Def time delay or add time delay

Logic setting of
enabling/disabling DPFC
5 50BF_Itb_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
current criterion to control
breaker failure protection.

Logic setting of
enabling/disabling phase
6 50BF_I_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
current criterion to control
breaker failure protection
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling
7 50BF_I0_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 zero-sequence current
criterion to control breaker
failure protection.
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling
8 50BF_I2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 negative-sequence current
criterion to control breaker
failure protection.

Logic setting of
9 50BF_Alm_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 enabling/disabling alarm of
breaker failure protection

Logic setting of
10 50BF_Trp_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 enabling/disabling time delay
of breaker failure protection

3.11 Residual Overvoltage Protection (59N)


3.11.1 Overview
The main purpose of Three Stage Residual Overvoltage Protection (59N) is to continuously
monitor the protected network residual overvoltage with the combination of zero-sequence
instrument transformer (VT). If any kind of trouble happen in protected electrical circuit likes open
or short circuit, it’s bring some type of disturbances. These disturbances will change the value of
grounding system impedance cause overvoltage in power system. If the detected value of restrain

104 PRS-778
Protection Functions

overvoltage is larger than set value of restrain overvoltage the protection will operate immediately.
This protection provides two stage controlling setting with definite time delay (DT) or IDMT time
delay.

In this protection have the capability of blocking function if some trouble happens between VT
circuit or IED logic circuit.

In addition, the 59N can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

3.11.1.1 Function Block

3.11.1.2 Signals

Table 3.11- 1 59N Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 59N1_Blk Block signal of 59 stage1
2 59N2_Blk Block signal of 59 stage2
3 59N3_Blk Block signal of 59 stage3
2 Ua,Ub,Uc the three phase group signal for voltage inputs
4 UN measuredresidual voltage

Table 3.11- 259G Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 59N1_Str Start signal from 59G stage1
2 59N1_Op Operation signal from 59G stage1
3 59N2_Str Start signal from 59G stage2
4 59N2_Op Operation signal from 59G stage2

PRS-778 105
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description


5 59N3_Str Start signal from 59G stage3
6 59N3_Op Operation signal from 59G stage3

3.11.2 Protection Principle


Residual overvoltage protection includes two stages residual overvoltage element with
independent logic, voltage and time delay settings. All the stages1 can be selected as definite-time
or inverse-time characteristic. The inverse-time characteristic can be selected as IEC or
ANSI/IEEE standard inverse-time characteristics and a user-defined inverse-time curve.

Residual overvoltage protection can select calculated residual voltage or measured residual
voltage according to the setting 59 _ _ when calculated residual voltage is adopted,
residual overvoltage protection can be blocked due to VT circuit failure if the setting
59 _ _ _ is set as “1”.

3.11.2.1 Operation Criterion

3U0 > 59Nx_Vol_Stror UN > 59Nx_Vol_Str

Where:

3U0 is calculated residual voltage;

UNismeasured residual voltage.

3.11.2.2 Time Curve

Stage 2 of residual overvoltage protection can be selected as definite-time or inverse-time


characteristic, and inverse-time operating time curve is as follows

 
 K 
t(I )    C   TP
 ( U ) -1 
 U 
 set 

Where:

, α and are constants.

is actual measured or calculated residual voltage.


IDMT Characteristic K α C Curve Type Selection
IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0.02 0 1 ■
IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 2 ■
IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 3 ■
IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 4 ■
IEC User inverse K α C 5 ■

106 PRS-778
Protection Functions

The user can select the operating characteristic from various inverse-time characteristic curves by
setting 59 _ _ _ .

In order to prevent it from undesired operation due to VT circuit failure when residual overvoltage
protection adopts calculated residual voltage, it is available to blockresidual overvoltage protection
according to the setting 59 _ _ _ and any of the following criterion is satisfied.

1) The device issues an alarm of corresponding side, Alm_VTS

2) VT of corresponding side is out of service, In_VT

3) Three phase voltages are all smaller than 1.2Un. (Un is secondary rated voltage)

3.11.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.11- 1 Logic diagram of residual overvoltage protection

Where:

3U0 is calculated residual or calculated voltage.

UN is measured residual voltage

3.11.4 Settings
Table 3.11- 3 Settings of residual overvoltage protection

No. Item Range Unit Step Default Description


Voltage setting of stage 1 of
1 59N1 _Vol_Str 2.00~200.00 V 0.01 200.00
residual overvoltage protection

Definite time of stage 1 of


2 59N1_Op_T 0.000~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
residual overvoltage protection

Selection of the type of time


3 59N1_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - - 0 delay curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for
IDMT

PRS-778 107
Supervision

No. Item Range Unit Step Default Description

Time multiplier for the inverse


4 59N1_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage 1

Minimum operate time for


5 59N1_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage 1

constant α of
6 59N1_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00 59N Stage 1

constant C of
7 59N1_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
59N Stage 1

constant K of
8 59N1_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000 59N Stage 1

Residual voltage option for the


calculation of stage 1 of residual
9 59N1_ZC_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 overvoltage protection
0: Measured residual voltage
1: Calculated residual voltage
When calculated residual voltage
is adopted, residual overvoltage
protection can be blocked due to
10 59N1_VTS_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
VT circuit failure if the setting
59N1_VTS_Blk_Ena is set as
“1”.
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling stage 1 of
11 59N1_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 residual overvoltage protection
0: disable
1: enable

Voltage setting of stage 2 of


12 59N2 _Vol_Str 2.00~200.00 V 0.01 110.00
residual overvoltage protection

108 PRS-778
Supervision

No. Item Range Unit Step Default Description

Definite time of stage 2 of


13 59N2_Op_T 0.000~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
residual overvoltage protection

Selection of the type of time


14 59N2_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - - 0 delay curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for
IDMT

Time multiplier for the inverse


15 59N2_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage2

Minimum operate time for


16 59N2_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage2

constant α of
17 59N2_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
59N Stage 2

constant C of
18 59N2_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
59N Stage 2

constant K of
19 59N2_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
59N Stage 2

Residual voltage option for the


calculation of stage 2 of residual
20 59N2_ZC_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 overvoltage protection
0: Measured residual voltage
1: Calculated residual voltage
When calculated residual voltage
is adopted, residual overvoltage
protection can be blocked due to
21 59N2_VTS_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
VT circuit failure if the setting
59N2 _VTS_Blk_Ena is set as
“1”.
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling stage 2 of
22 59N2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 residual overvoltage protection
0: disable
1: enable

PRS-778 109
Protection Functions

No. Item Range Unit Step Default Description

Voltage setting of stage 3 of


23 59N3_Vol_Str 2.00~200.00 V 0.01 110.00
residual overvoltage protection

Definite time of stage 3 of


24 59N3_Op_T 0.000~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
residual overvoltage protection

Selection of the type of time


25 59N3_Op_Curve_Type 0~5 - - 0 delay curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for
IDMT
Time multiplier for the inverse
26 59N3_T_Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 time delay
for stage3

Minimum operate time for


27 59N3_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
inverse curves for stage3

constant α of
28 59N3_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
59N Stage 3

constant C of
29 59N3_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
59N Stage 3

constant K of
30 59N3_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
59N Stage 3

Residual voltage option for the


calculation of stage 3 of residual
31 59N3_ZC_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 overvoltage protection
0: Measured residual voltage
1: Calculated residual voltage
When calculated residual voltage
is adopted, residual overvoltage
protection can be blocked due to
32 59N3_VTS_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
VT circuit failure if the setting
59N3_VTS_Blk_Ena is set as
“1”.
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling stage 3 of
33 59N3_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 residual overvoltage protection
0: disable
1: enable

110 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.12 Three-phase overvoltage protection (59P)


3.12.1 Overview
The main operating function of Two Stage Three-phase overvoltage protection (59P) is to
continuously measure the protected network voltage limit cause by different faults, if the detected
voltage limit is greater than set level the Two Stage Three-phase overvoltage the protection will
operates or gives alarm signal with dependable multi stage definite time delay (DT) or inverse
definite minimum time (IDMT) delay characteristics and each stage have same logics of setting.
This protection has extra ordinary feature to operate with overcurrent protection.

59Pcan support several kind of VT connection:

 Three phase voltage (Ua, Ub, Uc)

 Three phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc, Uca)

 Two phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc)

Two Stage Three-phase overvoltage protection 59P is also have blocking function capability.

In addition, the 59P can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

3.12.1.1 Function Block

3.12.1.2 Signals

Table 3.12- 1 59P Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 59P1_Blk Block signal of 59P stage1
2 59P2_Blk Block signal of 59P stage2
3 Ua,Ub,Uc the three phase group signal for voltage inputs

PRS-778 111
Protection Functions

Table 3.12- 2 Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 59P1_A_Str phase A Start signal from 59P stage1
2 59P1_B_Str phase B Start signal from 59P stage1
3 59P1_C_Str phase C Start signal from 59P stage1
4 59P1_ Str CommonStart signal from 59P stage1
5 59P1_A_Op phase A Operation signal from 59P stage1
6 59P1_B_Op phase B_Operation signal from 59P stage1
7 59P1_C_Op phase C Operation signal from 59P stage1
8 59P1_ Op Operation signal from 59P stage1
9 59P1_ Alm Alarm signal from 59P stage1
10 59P2_A_Str phase A Start signal from 59P stage2
11 59P2_B_Str phase B Start signal from 59P stage2
12 59P2_C_Str phase C Start signal from 59P stage2
13 59P2_ Str CommonStart signal from 59P stage2
14 59P2_A_Op phase A Operation signal from 59P stage2
15 59P2_B_Op phase B_Operation signal from 59P stage2
16 59P2_C_Op phase C Operation signal from 59P stage2
17 59P2_ Op Operation signal from 59P stage2
18 59P2_ Alm Alarm signal from 59P stage2

3.12.2 Protection Principle


The three-phase overvoltage protection function can be enabled or disabled by setting the
corresponding 59 _ parameter values as "1" or "0".

The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages iscompared
phase-wise to the set value of the 59 _ _ setting. If the measured value is higher than the
set value of the 59 _ _ setting, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in
which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty phases matches the set 59 _ _ ℎ_
and no blocking signal input is activated, the phase selection logic activates the timer and the
59 _ output and the corresponding output of the respective phases (59 _ _ / / ).

The 59 _ _ setting is used for selecting phase-to-earth ( 59 _ _ = 0 ) or


phase-to-phase(59 _ _ = 1) voltages for protection.

59 _ _ is the preset value to check for the voltage

59 _ _ ℎ_ shows the number of phases required for operate activation.

Depending on the value of the set 59 _ _ _ , the time characteristics are selected
according to DT (59 _ _ _ = 0) or IDMT (59 _ _ _ = 1~5). 59P supports
the following IDMT operating curve type:

112 PRS-778
Protection Functions

 
 
 K
t(I)   C   TP
 U  
 ( U ) 1 
 set 

IDMT Characteristic K α C Curve Type Selection


IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0.02 0 1 ■
IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 2 ■
IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 3 ■
IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 4 ■
IEC User inverse K α C 5 ■

When the operation timer has reached the value set by 59 _ _ in the DT mode or the value
set by the IDMT operate time curve, the 59 _ output is activated. The corresponding output
for the respective phases ( 59 _ _ / / ) is also activated. For the IDMT model,
59 _ _ _ defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is
exceeded, the reset state is activated, the timer is reset and the 59 _ output is deactivated.

The binary input 59 _ can be used to block the function. The activation of the 59 _ input
deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers. The binary input 59 _ can be used to
block the start signals and operating signals.

3.12.3 Logic Diagram

PRS-778 113
Protection Functions

Figure 3.12- 1Functional module diagram

Where:

59 _ _ _ is the selection of the type of stage x(X=1,2)time delay curve.

59 _ _ is the operating time delay for stage x(X=1,2)definite time curve.

59 _ _ _ is the minimum operate time delay for stage x(X=1,2)IDMT curves.

3.12.4 Settings
Table 3.12- 3settings of Two stage Three-phase overvoltage protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
1 59P1_Vol_Str 0.00~160.00 V 0.01 160.00 Start value of overvoltage
Operating time delay for
2 59P1_Op_T 0.040~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
definite time curve
Number of phases required for
operate activation:1 for 1
3 59P1_Str_Ph_Num 1/2/3 - 1 3
phase, 2 for 2 phases, 3 for 3
phases
Selection of the type of time
59P1_Op_Curve_Ty
4 0~5 - 1 0 delay curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for
pe
IDMT
5 59P1_T_ Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 Time multiplier in IEC curves
Minimum operate time delay for
6 59P1_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
IDMT curves
7 59P1_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00 constant α of

114 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
59P Stage 1
constant C of
8 59P1_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
59P Stage 1
constant K of
9 59P1_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
59P Stage 1
Parameter to select phase or
phase-to- phase voltages: 0
10 59P1_Vol_Opt 0/1 - 1 0
forphase voltages,1
forphase-to- phase voltages
11 59P1_Alm_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Alarm Off/On
12 59P1_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation Off/On
13 59P2_Vol_Str 0.00~160.00 V 0.01 110.00 Start value of overvoltage
Operating time delay for
14 59P2_Op_T 0.040~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
definite time curve
Number of phases required for
operate activation:1 for 1
15 59P2_Str_Ph_Num 1/2/3 - 1 3
phase, 2 for 2 phases, 3 for 3
phases
Selection of the type of time
59P2_Op_Curve_Ty
16 0~5 - 1 0 delay curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for
pe
IDMT
17 59P2_T_ Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 Time multiplier in IEC curves
Minimum operate time delay for
18 59P2_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
IDMT curves
constant α of
19 59P2_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
59P Stage 2
constant C of
20 59P2_C 0.000~10.000 - 0.001 0.000
59P Stage 2
constant K of
21 59P2_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
59P Stage 2
Parameter to select phase or
phase-to- phase voltages: 0
22 59P2_Vol_Opt 0/1 - 1 0
forphase voltages,1
forphase-to- phase voltages
23 59P2_Alm_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Alarm Off/On
24 59P2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation Off/On

PRS-778 115
Protection Functions

3.13 Three-phase Undervoltage Protection (27P)


3.13.1 Overview
The main operating function of Two Stage Three-phase undervoltage protection (27P) is to
continuously measure the protected network voltage limit cause by different faults, if the detected
voltage limit is below to set level the Two Stage Three-phase undervoltage protection will operates
or gives alarm signal with dependable multi stage definite time delay (DT) or inverse definite
minimum time (IDMT) delay characteristics and each stage have same logics of setting. This
protection has extra ordinary feature to operate with overcurrent protection.

27P can support several kind of VT connection:

 Three phase voltage (Ua, Ub, Uc)

 Three phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc, Uca)

 Two phase-to-phase voltages (Uab, Ubc)

Two Stage Three-phase undervoltage protection (27P) is also have blocking function capability.

In addition, the 27P can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or low-voltage
side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

3.13.1.1 Function Block

3.13.1.2 Signals

Table 3.13- 1 27P Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Ua,Ub,Uc “Ua,Ub,Uc” is the three phase group signal for voltage inputs
2 27P1_Blk Block signal of 27P stage1

116 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description


27P2_Blk Block signal of 27P stage2

Table 3.13- 227POutput Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 27P1_A_Str phase A Start signal from 27P stage1
2 27P1_B_Str phase BStart signal from 27P stage1
3 27P1_C_Str phase C Start signal from 27P stage1
4 27P1_Str CommonStart signal from 27P stage1
5 27P1_A_Op phase A Operation signal from 27 Pstage1
6 27P1_B_Op phase B Operation signal from 27P stage1
7 27P1_C_Op phase C Operation signal from 27P stage1
8 27P1_Op Operation signal from 27P stage1
9 27P1_Alm Alarm signal from 27P stage1
10 27P2_A_Str phase A Start signal from 27P stage2
11 27P2_B_Str phase BStart signal from 27P stage2
12 27P2_C_Str phase C Start signal from 27P stage2
13 27P2_Str CommonStart signal from 27P stage2
14 27P2_A_Op phase A Operation signal from27P stage2
15 27P2_B_Op phase B Operation signal from27P stage2
16 27P2_C_Op phase C Operation signal from27P stage2
17 27P2_Op Operation signal from 27P stage2
18 27P2_Alm Alarm signal from 27P stage2

3.13.2 Protection Principle


The three-phase undervoltage protection function can be enabled or disabled by setting the
corresponding 27 _ parameter values as "1" or "0".

The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are compared
phase-wise to the set value of the 27 _ _ setting. If the measured value is lower than the
set value of the 27 _ _ setting, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in
which the fault level is detected. If the number of faulty phases matches the set 27 _ _ ℎ_
and no blocking signal input is activated, the phase selection logic activates the timer and the
27P_Str output and the corresponding output of the respective phases (27 _ _ / / ).

The 27 _ _ setting is used for selecting phase-to-earth ( 27 _ _ = 0 ) or


phase-to-phase(27 _ _ = 1) voltages for protection.

27 _ _ is the preset value to check for the voltage

27 _ _ ℎ_ shows the number of phases required for operate activation.

Blocking for low current levels is activated by setting. The desired blocking level can be adjusted
by the 27 _ _ _ setting.

PRS-778 117
Protection Functions

For example:If the measured current level decreases below the 0.05A, either thetrip output of
stage 1, or both the trip and the START outputs of stage 1, are blocked. Blocking for low voltage
levels is activated by default.

Depending on the value of the set 27 _ _ _ , the time characteristics are selected
according to DT (27 _ _ _ = 0) or IDMT (27 _ _ _ = 1~5). 27P supports
the following IDMT operating curve type:

 
 
 K
t(I)   C   TP
 U  
1 ( U ) 
 set 

IDMT Characteristic K α C Curve Type Selection


IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0.02 0 1 ■
IEC Very inverse 13.5 1.0 0 2 ■
IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 2.0 0 3 ■
IEC Long-time inverse 120.0 1.0 0 4 ■
IEC User inverse K α C 5 ■

When the operation timer has reached the value set by 27 _ _ in the DT mode or the value
set by the IDMT operate time curve, the 27 _ output is activated. The corresponding output
for the respective phases ( 27 _ _ / / ) is also activated. For the IDMT model,
27 _ _ _ defines the minimum desired operate time for IDMT.

If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the operation delay is
exceeded, the reset state is activated, the timer is reset and the 27 _ output is deactivated.

The binary input 27 _ can be used to block the function. The activation of the 27 _ input
deactivates all outputs and resets the internal timers.

118 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.13.3 Logic Diagram

PRS-778 119
Protection Functions

Figure 3.13- 1Functional module diagram

3.13.4 Settings
Table 3.13- 3Settings of Two stage Three-phase undervoltage protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
1 27P1_Vol_Str 0.00~160.00 V 0.01 40.00 Start value of undervoltage
Operating time delay for definite
2 27P1_Op_T 0.040~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
time curve
Number of phases required for
3 27P1_Str_Ph_Num 1/2/3 - - 3 operate activation:1 for 1 phase, 2
for 2 phases, 3 for 3 phases

120 PRS-778
Supervision

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
27P1_Op_Curve_Ty Selection of the type of time delay
4 0~5 - - 0
pe curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for IDMT
5 27P1_T_ Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 Time multiplier in IEC curves
Minimum operate time delay for
6 27P1_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
IDMT curves
constant α of
7 27P1_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
27P Stage 1
constant C of
8 27P1_C 0.000~60.000 - 0.001 0.000
27P Stage 1
constant K of
9 27P1_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
27P Stage 1
Parameter to select phase or
phase-to- phase voltages: 0
10 27P1_Vol_Opt 0/1 - 1 0
forphase voltages,1 forphase-to-
phase voltages
undervoltage protection can be
blocked due to VT circuit failure if
11 27P1_VTS_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
the setting 27P1_VTS_Blk_Ena is
set as “1”.
undervoltage protection can be
blocked due to CT circuit failure if
12 27P1_I_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
the setting 27P1_I_Blk_Ena is set
as “1”.
Logic setting of nabling/disabling
undervoltage protection for alarm
13 27P1_Alm 0/1 - 1 0 purpose
0: disable
1: enable
14 27P1_Ena 0/1 - 1 1 Operation Off/On
15 27P2_Vol_Str 0.00~160.00 V 0.01 40.00 Start value of undervoltage
Operating time delay for definite
16 27P2_Op_T 0.040~300.000 s 0.001 10.000
time curve
Number of phases required for
17 27P2_Str_Ph_Num 1/2/3 - - 3 operate activation:1 for 1 phase, 2
for 2 phases, 3 for 3 phases
27P2_Op_Curve_Ty Selection of the type of time delay
18 0~5 - - 0
pe curve:0 for DT, 1~5 for IDMT
19 27P2_T_ Mult 0.050~200.000 - 0.001 10.000 Time multiplier in IEC curves
Minimum operate time delay for
20 27P2_Min_Op_T 0.000~60.000 s 0.001 0.050
IDMT curves
constant α of
21 27P2_Alpha 0.00~3.00 - 0.01 1.00
27P Stage 2

PRS-778 121
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
constant C of
22 27P2_C 0.000~60.000 - 0.001 0.000
27P Stage 2
constant K of
23 27P2_K 0.001~100.000 - 0.001 1.000
27P Stage 2
Parameter to select phase or
phase-to- phase voltages: 0
24 27P2_Vol_Opt 0/1 - 1 0
forphase voltages,1 forphase-to-
phase voltages
undervoltage protection can be
blocked due to VT circuit failure if
25 27P2_VTS_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
the setting 27P2_VTS_Blk_Ena is
set as “1”.
undervoltage protection can be
blocked due to CT circuit failure if
26 27P2_I_Blk_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
the setting 27P2_I_Blk_Ena is set
as “1”.
Logic setting of nabling/disabling
undervoltage protection for alarm
27 27P2_Alm 0/1 - 1 0 purpose
0: disable
1: enable
28 27P2_Ena 0/1 - 1 1 Operation Off/On

3.14 Overexcitation Protection (24)


3.14.1 Overview
In fact, the primary devices are stationary likes power transformer and some are rotating like
generators or motors are very expensive and from the point of view of continuous power supply
need to work properly. Over excitation disturb the proper operation of these primary devices and
harm the internal structure and lead to major damages. The main function of overexcitation
protection is to check the level of overexcitation of protected devices. If the relay detects the level
of overexcitation is greater than the set value, the overexcitation protection will operate.

The operating range of power system fundamental frequency for 50Hz system is 45~55Hz and for
60Hz system is 55~65Hz.

Notice!

For the point of view of suitable operation of protection, overexcited protection can be
configuring at any side of power transformer.

122 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.14.1.1 Function Block

3.14.1.2 Signals

Table 3.14- 124 Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 UA,UB,UC “UA,UB,UC” is the three phase group signal for voltage inputs
2 24_Blk Block signal from 24

Table 3.14- 224Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 24_DT_Str Start signal from 24DT
2 24_DT_Op Operation signal from 24DT
3 24_IDMT_Str Start signal from 24DMT
4 24_IDMT _Op Operation signal from 24DMT
5 24_IDMT _Alm Alarm signal from24DMT

3.14.2 Protection Principle


Overexcitation protection consists of one stage definitetime protection and one stage inversetime
protection,both of which can be used totrip the relevant breakeror alarm the users of the urgent
situation. The RMS values of three phase voltagesare used for protection calculation. Therefore,
the calculation result will not be affected by the frequency fluctuation. Overall, the overexcitation
inversetime curve is a sectional linear curve, which has high adaptability to all types of fault
situations.

The overexcitation severity can be representedby the overexcitation value,the result of voltage
dividingfrequency. The overexcitation valuecan be calculatedaccording to the following equation.

PRS-778 123
Protection Functions

U*
n
f*

Where:

∗ and ∗ are per unit value of voltage and frequency respectively.

The base value for calculating per unit value of voltage is the secondary voltage proportionsto the
primary voltage of one side of transformer, and the base value for calculating per unit value of
frequency is the measuredfrequency. Hence, if the transformer works under normal operation, n
should be equal to 1.

This base voltage calculation is automatically excutedcontinuously and the users only need not
enter the corresponding VT ratio when configuring the settings.

1,Definitetime operation criterion:

U * / f*  24 DT _ K

2,Inversetime operation criterion:

Inversetimecharacteristic is a curve that the overexcitation value inversely proportion to the


time.The value reflects the heat accumulation and radiation exponentially increase as the
overexcitation situation deteriorates. The overexcitation value iscalculated according the above
equation. After obtaining the overexcitation value, the time delay is obtainedby matching with the
sectional linear insertion.

Several groups of settings corresponding the pointson the curvecan be configured, which
finallydetermines the inversetime operation characteristics.This protection can adapt to
differentoverexcitation conditions of various transformers flexibly.

The belowfigure shows inversetime characteristic of overexcitation protection.

124 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Figure 3.14- 1 Inverse Time Characteristic of Overexcitation Protection

The main harm of overexcitation to transformer is rapidly accumulated heat, so accumulation


algorithmis adopted and the time delay can be calculatedaccording to characteristic curve basing
on the overexcitation value. When the accumulated time delay surpasses the operating time delay,
inversetime overexcitation protection operates.

Dissipating process is also applied to better protect the transformer.Whenthe overexcitation


valuedropsless than the minimum overexcitation multiple setting, the accumulated value
decreasesgradually instead of dropping to 0 directly. After theoverexcitation protection operates to
open the breaker and overexcitation condition disappears, the accumulatedthermaldecreases to 0
in 10s.

Overexcitation valueis the accumulated value by adding theoverexcitation information at current


instant and theoverexcitation information integrated over various time intervals from its beginning.

Inversetime characteristic curve can be demonstratedby modifying several overexcitation


valuesettings showed below.It also should be noticed that eachsetting of n and t should follow the
below rules(n1 ≥ n2…. ≥ n9;t1 ≤ t2…. ≤ t9).

3.14.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.14- 2 Logic Diagram of DefiniteTime Overexcitation Protection

PRS-778 125
Protection Functions

Figure 3.14- 3 Logic diagram of inverse-time overexcitation protection

3.14.4 Settings
Table 3.14- 3 Settings of Overexcitation Protection

Values
No. Item Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Multiple setting of stage 1 of definitetime
1 24_DT_K 1.00~1.60 - 0.01 1.00
overexcitation protection for trip purpose
Time delay setting of stage 1 of definitetime
2 24_DT_Op_T 0.1~9999.0 s 0.01 9999.0
overexcitation protection for trip purpose
Multiple setting 1 of inversetime
3 24_IDMT_Op_K1 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.50
overexcitation protection: n1
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
4 24_IDMT_Op _T1 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 1.0
setting 1: t1
Multiple setting 2 of inversetime
5 24_IDMT_Op _K2 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.45
overexcitation protection: n2
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
6 24_IDMT_Op _T2 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 1.5
setting 2: t2
Multiple setting 3 of inversetime
7 24_IDMT_Op _K3 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.40
overexcitation protection: n3
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
8 24_IDMT_Op _T3 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 2.0
setting 3: t3
Multiple setting 4 of inversetime
9 24_IDMT_Op _K4 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.35
overexcitation protection: n4
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
10 24_IDMT_Op _T4 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 2.5
setting 4: t4
Multiple setting 5 of inversetime
11 24_IDMT_Op _K5 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.30
overexcitation protection: n5
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
12 24_IDMT_Op _T5 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 3.0
setting 5: t5
Multiple setting 6 of inversetime
13 24_IDMT_Op _K6 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.25
overexcitation protection: n6

126 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Values
No. Item Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
14 24_IDMT_Op _T6 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 8.0
setting 6: t6
Multiple setting 7 of inversetime
15 24_IDMT_Op _K7 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.20
overexcitation protection: n7
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
16 24_IDMT_Op _T7 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 10.0
setting 7: t7
Multiple setting 8 of inversetime
17 24_IDMT_Op _K8 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.15
overexcitation protection: n8
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
18 24_IDMT_Op _T8 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 15.0
setting 8: t8
Multiple setting 9 of inversetime
19 24_IDMT_Op _K9 1.00~1.70 - 0.01 1.10
overexcitation protection: n9
Time delay setting corresponding to multiple
20 24_IDMT_Op _T9 0.1~9999.0 s 0.1 20.0
setting 9: t9
Voltage option between phase voltage and
phase-to-phase voltage for calculation of
21 24_Up/Upp 0/1 - 1 0 overexcitation protection
0: phase voltage
1: phase-to-phase voltage
Logic setting of enabling/disabling stage 1 of
definitetime overexcitation protection for trip
22 24_DT_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 purpose
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of enabling/disabling inversetime
overexcitation protection for trip purpose
23 24_IDMT_Trp_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of nabling/disabling inversetime
overexcitation protection for alarm purpose
24 24_IDMT_Alm_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
0: disable
1: enable

3.15 Overfrequency Protection(81O)

3.15.1 Overview
The main and important function of overfrequecy protection (81O) is to track or monitored the
protected zone of electrical power system, where very high accurate and dependable power
frequency detection is required. Because overfrequency cause many unwanted malfunction
operations in power system likes:

PRS-778 127
Protection Functions

 Disturbed the parallel operation of machines (generator or motor)

 Increase the size of conductor (skin effect)

 Increase the size of cores

 Disturbed the metering system capability

In order to prevent the electrical power system from above mentioned malfunctions, overfrequency
protection (81O) provide 4 different stages with definite time delay to overcome all problems
related to cause by overfreqency. The operation principle overfrequency protection (81O) is based
on the following points:

 Abnormal range of frequency

 Line-sequence voltage

overfrequency protection (81O) is also have a blocking capability.

3.15.1.1 Function Block

3.15.1.2 Signals

Table 3.15- 181O Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ua,Ub,Uc Three phase group signal for voltage inputs

2 f Frequency of protected zone of electrical power system

3 81O1_Blk Block signal of 81O stage 1

4 81O2_Blk Block signal of 81O stage 2

5 81O3_Blk Block signal of 81O stage 3

6 81O4_Blk Block signal of 81O stage 4

128 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Table 3.15- 281O Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 81O1 _Str Start signal from 81O stage 1

2 81O2 _Str Start signal from 81O stage 2

3 81O3 _Str Start signal from 81O stage 3

4 81O4 _Str Start signal from 81O stage 4

5 81O1_Op Operation signal from 81O stage 1

6 81O2_Op Operation signal from 81O stage 2

7 81O3_Op Operation signal from 81O stage 3

8 81O4_Op Operation signal from 81O stage 4

3.15.2 Protection Principle


Overfrequency protection consists of the four stages (stage 1 to stage 4).All stages overfrequency
protection with independent logic, frequency and time delay settings.

In order to prevent overfrequency protection from undesired operation, overfrequency protection


will be blocked in some cases.

1) Blocking in undervoltage condition

If the minimalline voltage ULmin<81 _ _ , the calculation of protection is not carried out and
the output relay will be blocked.

2) Frequency abnormality condition

When f<(fn-10)Hz or f>(fn+10)Hz, overfrequency protection will be blocked.

Frequency criterion for each stage is:

f > 81Ox_f_Str

3.15.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.15- 1 Overfrequency Protection logic diagram

PRS-778 129
Protection Functions

3.15.4 Settings
Table 3.15- 3 Settings of Overfrequency Protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Frequency setting for stage 1 of
1 81O1_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 60.10
overfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 1 of
2 81O1_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
overfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
3 81O1_UL_Blk 18.00~100.00 V 0.01 30.00
overfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
4 81O1_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 1 of overfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable
Frequency setting for stage 2 of
5 81O2_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 60.10
overfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 2 of
6 81O2_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
overfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
7 81O2_UL_Blk 18.00~100.00 V 0.01 30.00
overfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
8 81O2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 2 of overfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable
Frequency setting for stage 3 of
9 81O3_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 60.10
overfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 3 of
10 81O3_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
overfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
11 81O3_UL_Blk 18.00~100.00 V 0.01 30.00
overfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
12 81O3_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 3 of overfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable
Frequency setting for stage 4 of
13 81O4_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 60.10
overfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 4 of
14 81O4_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
overfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
15 81O4_UL_Blk 18.00~100.00 V 0.01 30.00
overfrequency protection

130 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
16 81O4_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 4 of overfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable

3.16 Underfrequency Protection(81U)


3.16.1 Overview
The main function of underfrequecy protection (81U) is to continuously track the frequency of
protected zone of electrical power system, where very high accurate and dependable power
frequency detection is required. Because underfrequency cause many unwanted malfunction
operations in power system. In electrical power system there are many reason to cause the
underfrequency likes one of them is active power is not fulfilling match with required power of
system. The operation principle overfrequency protection (81U) is based on the following points:

 Abnormal range of frequency

 Line-sequence voltage

underfrequency protection (81U) is provide very accurate and reliable operation with four stage
definite time delay and each stage have same setting of approach. underfrequency protection (81)
is also have a blocking capability.

3.16.1.1 Function Block

3.16.1.2 Signals

Table 3.16- 181U Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

PRS-778 131
Protection Functions

NO. Signal Description


1 Ua,Ub,Uc Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
2 f Frequency of protected zone of electrical power system
3 81U1_Blk Block signal of 81U stage 1
4 81U2_Blk Block signal of 81U stage 2
5 81U3_Blk Block signal of 81U stage 3
6 81U4_Blk Block signal of 81U stage 4

Table 3.16- 281U Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 81U1_Str Start signal from 81U stage 1
2 81U2_Str Start signal from 81U stage 2
3 81U3_Str Start signal from 81U stage 3
4 81U4_Str Start signal from 81U stage 4
5 81U1_Op Operation signal from 81U stage 1
6 81U2_Op Operation signal from 81U stage 2
7 81U3_Op Operation signal from 81U stage 3
8 81U4_Op Operation signal from 81U stage 4

3.16.2 Protection Principle


Underfrequency Protection consists of the four stages (stage 1 to stage 4).All stages
underfrequency protection with independent logic, frequency and time delay settings.

In order to prevent underfrequency protection from undesired operation, underfrequency


protectionwill be blocked in some cases.

1) Blocking in undervoltage condition

If the minimalline voltage ULmin<81 _ _ , the calculation of protection is not carried out and
the output relay will be blocked.

2) Frequency abnormality condition

When f<(fn-10)Hz or f>(fn+10)Hz, overfrequency protection will be blocked

Frequency criterion for each stage is:

< 81 _ _

132 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.16.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.16- 1 Logic diagram of underfrequency Protection

3.16.4 Settings
Table 3.16- 3 Settings of Underfrequency Protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Frequency setting for stage 1 of
1 81U1_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 59.90
underfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 1 of
2 81U1_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
underfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
3 81U1_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.1 30.00
underfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
4 81U1_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 1 of underfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable
Frequency setting for stage 2 of
5 81U2_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 59.90
underfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 2 of
6 81U2_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
underfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
7 81U2_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.1 30.00
underfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
8 81U2_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 2 of underfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable
9 81U3_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 59.90 Frequency setting for stage 3 of

PRS-778 133
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
underfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 3 of
10 81U3_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
underfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
11 81U3_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.1 30.00
underfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
12 81U3_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 3 of underfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable
Frequency setting for stage 4 of
13 81U4_f_Str 20.00~100.00 Hz 0.01 59.90
underfrequency protection
Time delay for stage 4 of
14 81U4_Op_T 0.08~200.00 S 0.01 10.00
underfrequency protection
Voltage value of blocking
15 81U4_UL_Blk 0.00~100.00 V 0.1 30.00
underfrequency protection
Enabling/disabling rate of
frequency change to block stage
16 81U4_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 4 of underfrequency protection
0: disable
1: enable

3.17 Rate-of-change of frequency protection (81R)


3.17.1 Overview
The chief important function of Rate-of-change of frequency protection (81R) is to continuously
check the rate of change of power system fundamental frequency. Because the rate of change of
frequency is great impact on electrical power system. The power grid supply frequency is not
constant every time its change time to time and load to load, if any situation the variation of power
grid frequency is greater than allowable limits of normal operation it’s cause many unwanted fault
in power system likes.

 Disturbed the parallel operation of machines (generator or motor)

 Disturbed the metering system capability

 Harm the system

Rate-of-change of frequency protection (81R) is provide very accurate and reliable operation with
one stage definite time delay .

134 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.17.1.1 Function Block

3.17.1.2 Signals

Table 3.17- 181R Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ua,Ub,Uc Three phase voltage inputs.

2 f Frequency of protected zone of electrical power system

3 81R_Blk Block signal of 81R

Table 3.17- 281R Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 81R _Str Start signal from 81R

2 81R _Op Operation signal from 81R

3.17.2 Protection Principle


The rate of change of the frequency of the positive sequence voltage is calculated from
phase-to-phase or phase-to-earth voltages and compared to the set 81 _ _ . If the
measured frequency rate of change is higher than the set 81 _ _ and no block signal is
activated, the operate timer and 81 _ signal are activated. However, if the voltage magnitude
is below the 81 _ _ set value or the difference between the measured frequency and the rated
frequency exceeds 10 Hz, the operate timer and 81 _ signal are deactivated.

81 _ _ is the frequency gradient start value. When the setting 81 _ _ = 1 , it


means a positive change in frequency. Otherwise, it means a negative change in frequency.

NOTICE!

81 _ _ is the setting level compared to the physically connected voltages. For


example, if phase-to-phase voltages are physically connected (phase-to-earth voltages
virtual), the 10% setting results in ten percent of the normal phase-to-phase voltage. If
phase-to-earth voltages are connected (phase-to-phase voltages virtual), the 10%
setting results in 17 percent of the normal phase-to-earth voltage. This is assuming the
base voltage is set to be the normal/nominal phase-to-phase voltage.

 Timer

PRS-778 135
Protection Functions

Once activated, the 81 _ outputactivates. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the
operation timer has reached the value set by 81 _ _ , the 81 _ output is activated. If the
frequency rate of change condition disappears before the module operates, the operation resets
with a set time delay of 81 _ _ .

The activation of the 81 _ input resets the timer and deactivates the 81 _ and 81 _
outputs.

81 _ _ is the operation delay time setting of the 81R.

81 _ _ is the reset delay time setting of the 81R.

3.17.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.17- 1Rate-of-change of frequency protection logic diagram

3.17.4 Settings
Table 3.17- 3 Settings of Rate-of-change of frequency Protection

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


1 81R_Dfdt_Str 0.50 - 10.00 Hz/s 0.01 0.50 Frequency gradient start value
Negative/positive change in
2 81R_FrUp_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 frequency:0 for negative, 1 for
positive
3 81R_Op_T 0.12 - 60.00 s 0.01 1.00 Operate time delay
4 81R_Reset_T 0.00 - 60.00 s 0.01 0.20 Time delay for reset
5 81R_UL_Blk 18.00 – 100.00 V 0.01 30.00 Voltage value of blocking 81R
6 81R_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Operation disable/enable

3.18 Reactor differential protection (87R)


3.18.1 Overview
In electrical power system or electrical power industry, power reactor is the one of the important
primary equipment. For this main point of view, the protection of power reactor is very important
task. If some kind of trouble or fault situation happen in the protected zone of the power reactor,
then need to clear this trouble or fault as soon as possible. Reactor differential protection (87R) is
specially designed for such kind of trouble or fault situation to protect reactor from maximum cause

136 PRS-778
Protection Functions

of injuries or harm and operate the protection as quick as possible.

Reactor differential protection (87R) have two dependable operating function of element likes
biased differential element and instantaneous differential element.

1) Biased differential element is operation based on with three characteristics slope.

2) Instantaneous differential element increase the operating speed of protection during internal
fault of reactor without three characteristics slope of biased differential element.

3) Some other important and superior special functions of 87R protection are:

 Meticulousphase compensation IED calculation criteria.


 Accurate and fast fault tracking capability.

Above mentioned these two element of reactor differential protection function are highly proved to
sense quickly any abnormal situation in protected zone of reactor and in case of any abnormalty is
detected then very fast trip command is issued.

Notice!

Point of view of user’s project and real time experience, some of the pretection function of
reactor differential protection (87R) are enable or disable according to the customer’s or
user’s demand of situation.

3.18.1.1 Function Block

PRS-778 137
Protection Functions

3.18.1.2 Signals

Table 3.18- 1 87R Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

3 Ida, Idb, Idc Three phase differential current of 87R

4 87R_Blk Block signal of 87R

Table 3.18- 2 87R Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

29 87R _Str Start signal ofdifferential from 87R

30 87R _Str_A Start_A signal ofdifferential from 87R

31 87R_Str_B Start_B signal ofdifferential from 87R

32 87R _Str_C Start_C signal ofdifferential from 87R

33 87R_ Op Operation signal ofdifferential from 87R

34 87R_Inst_Str Start signal of instantaneous differential from 87R

35 87R_Inst_Str_A Start_A signal of instantaneous differential from 87R

36 87R_Inst_Str_B Start_B signal of instantaneous differential from 87R

37 87R_Inst_Str_C Start_C signal of instantaneous differential from 87R

38 87R_ Inst_Op Operation signal of instantaneous differential from 87R

39 87R_CTFail CT failsignal of 87R

3.18.2 Protection Principle

3.18.2.1 Phase Overcurrent Element

The device can regulate the difference in transformation ratio between CTs at each side of reactor.
Each side is provided with a CT transformation ratio regulation coefficient which is multiplied by
current quantity collected by the device to get the quantity after regulation of CT transformation
ratio. By simply entering relevant parameters of reactor (refer to the table of settings), it’s possible
to automatically obtain regulation coefficient of CT at each side without the need for external
connection with auxiliary CT. Such type of regulation is more reliable when compared with
regulation performed using hardware circuit.

3.18.2.2 Magnitude Compensation

 Rated primary current at each side of Reactor

1 =
3 1

Where:

means maximum rated capacity of reactor nameplate, and 1 represents rated primary

138 PRS-778
Protection Functions

voltage at calculated side of reactor.

CT transformation ratio at each side of reactor

1
=
2

Where, 2 rated secondary current of CT is 5A or 1A; 1 "primary side of CT” is dependent on


corresponding settings of system parameters.

Rated secondary current at each side of reactor

1
2 =

CT balance coefficient at each side of differential protection

With HV side as reference, the balance coefficient at HV side is fixedly set to 1.

Balance coefficient at LV side (switch CT):

ℎ − =

In the formula, means CT transformation ratio of CB at LV side.

3.18.2.3 Fault detector based on biased differential current

The fault detector can initiate biased differential element, and its operation equation is shownas
below.

Idmax>0.9*87R_Cur_Str

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

3.18.2.4 Fault detector based on instantaneous differential current

The fault detector can initiate instantaneous differential element, and its operation equation is
shownas below.

Idmax>0.9*87R_Cur_Inst

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

PRS-778 139
Protection Functions

3.18.2.5 Calculation of Differential and Restraint Currents

The equation of calculating differential current is:

 I dA  I HA
  I LA


  I LB
I dB  I HB 
I  I   I 
 dC HC LC

The equation of calculating restraint current is:


 I rA  2  I HA  
1
  I LA


 I HB  
1
I rB    I LB
 2
I  1  I   I  
 rC 2
HC LC

Where:

IdA, IdB, IdC are differential currents.

IrA, IrB, IrC are restraint currents.

3.18.2.6 Biased Low Stage

> 1 × + < 1

> 2 × − 1 + 1 × 1 + 1 ≤ < 2

> 3 × − 2 + 2 × 2 − 1 + 1 × 1 + ≥ 2

Where:

Id Ir
and are respectively the differential current and the restraint current.

I Str
is the start setting of biased differential protection (i.e., 87R_Cur_Str).

“Knee1” and “Knee2” are respectively current settings of knee point 1 and knee point 2, the
corresponding set value: 87R_Cur_K1 and 87R_Cur_K2).

“K1”, “K2” and “K3” are three slopes of biased differential protection, the corresponding set
value: 87R_Slope1, 87R_Slope2, 87R_Slope3.

Operation characteristic of sensitive biased differential element is shown below.

140 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Figure 3.17- 1 Operation characteristic of differential protection

3.18.2.7 Instantaneous High Stage

Instantaneous high stage for reactor is to accelerate the operation speed for reactor's internal fault.
The operation of the instantaneous high stage is not biasedand has no blocking element.
Instantaneoushigh stage shall operate to clear the fault when any phase differential current is
higher than its setting. Its operation criterion is:

Idmax> 87R_Cur_Inst

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

3.18.2.8 Differential CT circuit abnormality

If the differential current in any phase is continually greater than the alarm setting 87R_Cur_Alm
over 10s, the differential current abnormality alarm will be issued, but this alarm will not block
differential protection.

Figure 3.17-3Differential CT Circuit Abnormality

3.18.2.9 Differential CT circuitfailure

This is a differential protection CT circuit failure criterion.

First of all, the possibility of concurrence of multi-side CT line-break and fault is not taken into
consideration. Under this premise, it’s possible to distinguish between CT circuit failure and fault
based on the following characteristic.In case of CT circuit failure, it’s necessary to specifically

PRS-778 141
Protection Functions

identify circuit failure phase.

Single-phase or two-phase CTcircuit failure:

min{I a , I b , I c }  0.5 I e
a)

max{I a , I b , I c }  1.1I e
b)

c) Self side: 3I 0  0.3Ie

d) Other side: 3I 0  0.2Ie

e) Other side:Imax> 0.04

Blocking of biased differential protection by CT circuit failure follows the following principle:

 When “CTS_Blk_Ena” is set to “1”, biased differential protection would be blocked in case of
CT circuit failure (as for longitudinal percentage differential protection and split-phase
percentage differential protection, differential protection would be blocked when differential
current is less than 1.2Ie and would not when more than 1.2Ie; with respect to cell differential
protection, differential protection would be blocked when differential current is less than 1.2Ie
and would not when more than 1.2Ie. Here, Ie means rated secondary current at HV side of
reactor, while ILe represents rated secondary current at LV side of reactor).

 When “CTS_Blk_Ena” is set to “0”, biased differential protection would not be blocked in case
of CT circuit failure.

Where:

"CTS_Blk_Ena” is effective for Biased low stage.

It should be noted that CT circuit failure induced blocking is principally designed to prevent
malfunction of differential protection caused by CT circuit failure and follows the following
principles:

Firstly, concurrence of multi-side CT circuit failureis not taken into account; secondly, differential
protection trip is allowed in case of concurrence of failure and CT circuit failure; thirdly, relevant
protection should be blocked when fault occurs after CT circuit failure; fourthly, protection shall
operate if CT circuit failure occurs after the occurrence of fault.

142 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.18.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.18- 4 Logic diagram of 87R_Inst protection

Figure 3.18- 5 Logic diagram of 87R protection

Where:

Idmax is the maximum value of three phase differential currents.

“87T_CTFail” means that the flag of CT circuit failure.

3.18.4 Settings
Table 3.18- 3 Settings of Reactor differential protection

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


Pickup setting of biased
1 87R_Cur_Str 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 0.40
differential element
Current setting of instantaneous
2 87R_Cur_Inst 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 6.00
differential element
Coefficient of second harmonics
3 87R_K_Hm2 0.05~0.50 - 0.01 0.15
for inrush current detection
Current setting of differential
4 87R_Cur_Alm 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00
circuit abnormality alarm
Current setting of knee point 1 for
5 87R_Cur_K1 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00
transformer differential protection

PRS-778 143
Protection Functions

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


Current setting of knee point 2 for
6 87R_Cur_K2 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 6.00
transformer differential protection
Slope 1 of biased differential
7 87R _Slope1 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.00
element
Slope 2 of biased differential
8 87R _Slope2 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.50
element
Slope 3 of biased differential
9 87R _Slope3 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.75
element
Option of inrush current
discrimination principle:
10 87R_Opt_Inrush 0~3 - 1 0
0: Without Inrush CurrentBlock
1: Harmonic principle
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling conventional
11 87R _Ena 0,1 - 1 0 biased differential element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling instantaneous
12 87R_Inst_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 differential element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling differential
13 87R_Alm_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 Alam element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling block biased
differential element during CT
14 87R_CTS_Blk_Ena 0,1 1 0
circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable

144 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.19 Reactor zero-sequence differential protection (87N)


3.19.1 Overview

3.19.1.1 Function Block

3.19.1.2 Signals

Table 3.19- 1 87N Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

5 I0d zero-sequence differential current of 87N


6 87N_Blk Block signal of 87N

Table 3.19- 2 87N Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

40 87N _Str Start signal ofdifferential from 87N

41 87N_ Op Operation signal ofdifferential from 87N

42 87N_Inst_Str Start signal of instantaneous differential from 87N

43 87N_ Inst_Op Operation signal of instantaneous differential from 87N

44 87N_Alm Alarm signal of differential 87N

45 87N_CTFail CT failsignal of 87N

3.19.2 Protection Principle

3.19.2.1 Amplitude Compensation

CT balance coefficient at each side of differential protection

With HV side as reference, the balance coefficient at HV side is fixedly set to 1.

Balance coefficient at LV side (switch CT):

PRS-778 145
Protection Functions

ℎ − =

3.19.2.2 Fault detector based on biased differential current

The fault detector can initiate biased differential element, and its operation equation is shownas
below.

I0d>0.9*87N_Cur_Str

Where:

I0d is the value of three phase zero-sequencedifferential current.

3.19.2.3 Fault detector based on instantaneous differential current

The fault detector can initiate instantaneous differential element, and its operation equation is
shownas below.

I0d>0.9*87N_Cur_Inst

Where:

I0d is the value of zero-sequence differential current.

3.19.2.4 Calculate Differential and Restraint Current

Zero-sequence differential current and restraint current are calculated as the following formulas :

' '
0 = ℎ0 + 0

1 ' '
0 = ∗ ℎ0 − 0
2
Where:

I0d is the zero-sequence differential current;

I0r is the zero-sequence restraint current;

3.19.2.5 Operation Criterion

The operation criteria of 87N protection are as follows:

0 > 1 × 0 + < 1

0 > 2 × 0 − 1 + 1 × 1 + 1 ≤

146 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Where:

0 and 0 are respectively the differential current and the restraint current.

is the start setting of biased differential protection (i.e., 87N_Cur_Str).

“Knee1” is respectively current settings of knee point 1, the corresponding set value:
87R_Cur_K1).

“K1” and “K2” are three slopes of biased differential protection, the corresponding set value:
87R_Slope1, 87R_Slope2.

3.19.2.6 Operation Characteristic

Figure 3.19- 1 Operation characteristic of 87N

Where:

I0d is the differential current;I0r is the restraint current;87N_Cur_Str is the start of differential
current.

3.19.2.7 CT Transient Characteristic Difference Detection

3I0  B0  I1

Where:

3I 0 is the zero-sequence current at a side.

I 1 is its corresponding positive-sequence current.

PRS-778 147
Protection Functions

B0is a proportional constant and the value is 0.2.

3.19.2.8 CT Circuit Failure

Please refer to Section 3.2.2.12 for details.

3.19.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.19- 2 Logic diagram of 87N_Inst protection

Figure 3.19- 3 Logic diagram of 87N protection

Where:

I0d is the value of zero-sequence differential currents.

“87N_CTFail” means that the flag of CT circuit failure.

3.19.4 Settings
Table 3.19- 2 Settings of Reactor differential protection

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


Pickup setting of biased
1 87N_Cur_Str 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 0.40
differential element
Current setting of instantaneous
2 87N_Cur_Inst 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 6.00
differential element
3 87N_Cur_Alm 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00 Current setting of differential

148 PRS-778
Protection Functions

No. Name Range Unit Step Default Description


circuit abnormality alarm
Current setting of knee point 1 for
6 87N_Cur_K1 0.05~20.00 IE 0.01 1.00
transformer differential protection
Slope 1 of biased differential
8 87N _Slope1 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.00
element
Slope 2 of biased differential
9 87N _Slope2 0~0.90 - 0.01 0.50
element
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling conventional
12 87N _Ena 0,1 - 1 0 biased differential element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling instantaneous
13 87N_Inst_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 differential element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling differential
14 87N_Alm_Ena 0,1 - 1 0 Alam element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling block biased
differential element during CT
16 87N_CTS_Blk_Ena 0,1 1 0
circuit failure
0: disable
1: enable

3.20 Reactor interturn Protection (21IT)


3.20.1 Overview
The inter-turn short circuit of the reactor is a common form of internal fault. When the number of
short-circuit turns is small, the three-phase current imbalance caused by one-phase short-circuit is
likely to be small, which is difficult to be detected by relay protection.For this purpose,
high-sensitivity, reliable and reliable inter-turn short-circuit protection(21IT) must be considered for
high-voltage shunt reactors.The device uses a compensated absolute value comparison type zero
sequence directional element and a negative sequence direction, a zero sequence impedance
element and an interturn short circuit protection starting element.It can improve the sensitivity of
the protection action between reactors and ensure that it is not accidentally caused by external
faults and any abnormal operating conditions.

PRS-778 149
Protection Functions

3.20.1.1 Function Block

3.20.1.2 Signals

Table 3.20- 121IT Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Ia,Ib,Ic Three phase current of 21IT
2 Ua,Ub,Uc Three phase voltage of 21IT
3 21IT_Blk Block signal of 21IT

Table 3.20- 221IT Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 21IT_I0_Str Zero-sequence current start signal from 21IT
2 21IT_I0DLT_Str Break current start signal from 21IT
3 21IT_PHASE_A_Str Impedance Astart signal of 21IT
4 21IT_PHASE_B_Str Impedance B start signal of 21IT
5 21IT_PHASE_C_Str Impedance C start signal of 21IT
6 21IT_Str Start signal of 21IT
7 21IT_Op Operation signal of 21IT

3.20.2 Protection Principle

3.20.2.1 Zero-sequence current start

3 0 > 0

Where:

3 0 is the Zero-sequence current of high side.

0 = 0.2 ∗ .

150 PRS-778
Protection Functions

3.20.2.2 Break current start

∆3 0 = 3 0 −3 0 − − 3 0 − −3 0 −2 > 0

Where:

0 = 0.3 ∗ .

3.20.2.3 Phase Impedancestart

' ' ' '


− ℎ + ℎ + ℎ ∗ 0
= '
< 0.92 ∗ 1

1 ∗
0 =
1 ∗ 10
∗ 1000
1 =
1 ∗ 10 ∗ ∗ 3

Where:
'
is the phase voltage of high side.
'
is the phase current of high side.
' ' '
ℎ , ℎ , ℎ is the three phase current of high side.

0 is theZero-sequenceImpedanceof the neutral point reactor .

1 is thesecondaryImpedanceof the main reactor .

3.20.2.4 Zero-sequence direction components

' ' '


0 − 0 ∗ 0.9 0 > 0

0 = 1 +3∗ 0

Where:
'
0 is the Zero-sequence voltage of high side.

0 is theZero-sequenceImpedanceof the main reactor .

3.20.2.5 Negative-sequence direction components

' ' '


2 − 2 ∗ 0.9 1 > 2

Where:

1 is thesecondaryImpedanceof the main reactor .

PRS-778 151
Protection Functions

3.20.3 Logic Diagram

Figure 3.20- 1 Logic diagram of 21IT protection

3.20.4 Settings
Table 3.20- 3 Settings of Reactor interturn Protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling zero /
negative sequence
1 21IT_I02_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
directional element
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling phase
2 21IT _PHZK_Ena 0/1 - 1 0
impedance element
0: disable

152 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
1: enable

Logic setting of
enabling/disabling 21IT
3 21IT _Ena 0/1 - 1 0
0: disable
1: enable

3.21 Out-of-Step Protection 78O


3.21.1 Overview
When the power system loses synchronism, out-of-step protection 78O can automatically
disconnect the power plant and the associated load from the power system to prevent damage.

78O use voltage angle criteria and it can adapt to a variety range of power grid structures and
operation mode. 78O has the following characteristics:

 Using the criterion of voltage angle, 78O can accurately identifies the system oscillation. The
function can operate reliably and correctly if the oscillation period is less than 160ms.

 78O is not affected by the fault, for example, three-phase symmetrical fault and its recovery,
converted fault and power swing which does not lead to system out-of-step.

 When the system is in open-phase operation mode, 78O will not operate even if the system is
out-of-step. When the system returns to full-phase operation mode and is still in out-of-step
condition, 78O will operate.

 The 78O function can identify the system power angle and avoid disconnecting the circuit
breaker when the angle difference is around 180 °.

3.21.1.1 Function Block

3.21.1.2 Signals

Table 3.21- 1 78O Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 Ua,Ub,Uc Three-phase voltage input

2 Ia,Ib,Ic Three-phase current input

3 78O_Blk Blocking signal of 78O

PRS-778 153
Protection Functions

Table 3.21- 2 78O Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

1 78O_Str Start signal from 78O

2 78O_Op Operation signal from 78O

3.21.2 Protection Principle


3.21.2.1 Start of the Function

By calculating the voltage at oscillation center of the transmission line, the function can detect
whether the system is in power swing or symmetry fault condition.

−0.7 < 1 cos ( ) < 0.7


3 1 > 18 ∧ 3 2 < 8 ∧ 3 0 < 8
3 0 < 300 ∧ 1 > 500

Where:

Unis the rated voltage.

U1 is positive-sequence voltage.

U2 is negative-sequence voltage.

U0 is zero-sequence voltage.

I1 is positive-sequence current.

φis the angle difference between positive-sequence voltage and current.

The function will operate when the criterion is met and last for at least 25ms.

3.21.2.2 Power Swing Detection

The function detects the out-of-step oscillation according to the change of the voltage at oscillation
center, and simultaneously evaluates the amplitude and period of oscillation and the power angle
to decide whether to operate.

Calculation of the voltage of power swing center can be done through the following fomula:

cos = 1 cos ( + )

Where:

φis the angle difference between positive-sequence voltage and positive-sequence current.

δis the line positive-sequence impedance angle, set by the setting LinAng.

Ucos have the following waveforms (converted to per unit value):

154 PRS-778
Protection Functions

0 To 2To t

1

Figure 3.21.1 Voltage at Accelerate Side

0 To 2To t

1

Figure 3.21.2 Voltage at Decelerate Side

The two voltage waveforms above satisfy the following equations:

cos_accel = cos
0

cos_ =− cos
0

Where:
T0 is the oscillation period.
Divide the waveform of Ucos into 6 areas within one oscillation period:

PRS-778 155
Protection Functions

Figure 3.21.3 Phase Division of Vector Diagram

Figure 3.21.4 Division of Waveform

Where in area 0: Ucos > 0.966

Area 1: 0.707 < Ucos < 0.966

Area 2:0.259 < Ucos < 0.707

Area 3:-0.259 < Ucos < 0.259

Area 4: -0.707 < Ucos <- 0.259

Area 5:-0.966 < Ucos <- 0.707

Ucos falls into each area for an equal time T0 6in one oscillation period.

In the accelerate side, Ucos  swing across the areas in the following order:

0→1→2→3→4→5→0

In the decelerate side, Ucos swing across the areas in the following order:

0→5→4→3→2→1→0

156 PRS-778
Protection Functions

The 78O function records the history of areas that Ucos once passed and compare it with the above
order. If the order is the same, the function’s internal flag Pswing_Cond will be set to 1.

High speed tripping:

In some situations, 78O is required to operate as soon as possible when a loss of synchronization
is detected, for which the function provides a high-speed tripping criterion:

The function simply detects if Ucos havecrossed through area 3 in the above order, for example:

5→4→3→2

And the absolute value of Ucos is greater than 10V.

If the two conditions are met, the function’s internal flag Pswing_Inst_Cond will be set to 1.

Notice that high speed trip will only be enable if the setting 78O_InstTrp_Ena is set to 1.

3.21.2.3 Power Swing Center Locating and Direction Determination

Power swing center location determination criterion:

When Ucos falls into area 3 and the positive-sequence voltage is below the threshold voltage
setting 78O_Op_LowVol for 10ms, the function considered the swing center to be somewhere
within the protection zone and the function’s internal flag 78O_Pswing_Loc will be set to 1.

Power swing center direction determination criterion:

When the absolute value of Ucos is less than 0.1Un, the power swing center is considered to be in
the forward direction if the phase angle 30° < Angle U1 /I1 < 150° , and reverse direction if
-150° < Angle U1 /I1 <- 30°.

Notice that direction criterion will be automatically satisfied if the direction determination is not enable.
And if the setting 78O_Dir_Ena is set to 1, the direction criterion will also be satisfied if 78O_Dir_Mod is
set to 0.

3.21.2.4 Tripping Angle Determination

When all the other operation conditions are met, if Ucos falls into area 3 while the phase angle
150° < Angle U1 /I1 < 210°, tripping signal will be blocked until Ucos cross through area 3.

3.21.2.5 Power Swing Cycle Counting

The threshold setting of oscillation cycle number 78O_Op_Pswing_Num is an important


parameter in the function. 78O will need more than the setting number of swing cycles counting to
operate. 78O_Op_Pswing_Num should be set to 1 if fast disconnecting is required;
78O_Op_Pswing_Num should be set to 3 or 4 in order to cooperate with the out-of-step protection
of adjacent lines, which ensures that 78O will not operate before the disconnection of the adjacent
line; After the out-of-step oscillation, it is hoped that the out-of-step system can be pulled back into
synchronization, in this case, 78O_Op_Pswing_Num should be set to 5 to 10 which can leave
enough time for the system recovery. In short, the choice of 78O_Op_Pswing_Num should be
based on the actual situation of the system and the cooperation with other protection device.

PRS-778 157
Protection Functions

3.21.2.6 Abnormal Condition Blocking of the Function

78O will be blocked in the following conditions:

 When three-phase fault occurs in the power system.

 When the zero-sequence or negative-sequence voltage or current is in abnormal condition.

 When Ucos stays in any area for more than 1.5 seconds.

Notice that all the internal flag will be reset if abnormal condition is detected and the oscillation
cycle counting will be set to 0 too.

3.21.3 Logic

Figure 3.21.5 78O Start

158 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Figure 3.21.6 78O Direction element

Figure 3.21.7 78O Operation

PRS-778 159
Protection Functions

Figure 3.21.8 78O Ucos Area Detection

Figure 3.21.9 Abnormal Condition Blocking of 78O

3.21.4 Settings
Table 3.21- 3 78O Settings

NO Name Range Unit Step Description


Enabling/disabling of out-of-step
protection:
1 78O_Ena 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling high speed trip of
out-of-speed protection
2 78O_InstTrp_Ena 0 or 1
0: disable
1: enable
Enabling/disabling direction
3 78O_Dir_Ena 0 or 1 determination of out-of-step
protection:

160 PRS-778
Protection Functions

NO Name Range Unit Step Description


0: disable
1: enable

Low voltage threshold of out-of-step


4 78O_Op_LowVol 0.00~1.00 Un 0.01
protection

Threshold number of power swing


5 78O_Op_Pswing_Num 1~15 1
cycle counting

Direction option for out-of-step


protection:
6 78O_Dir_Mod 0, 1, 2 1 0: Non-Directional
1: Forward

2: Reverse

3.22 Mechanical Relay Protection (MR)


3.22.1 Overview
The main transformer protection can provide mechanical protection as the main protection of
transformer fault. The mechanical protection includes mechanical protection after delay and
mechanical protection without delay.

3.22.1.1 Function Block

Figure 3.22- 1 Delay Of Mechanical Relay

PRS-778 161
Protection Functions

Figure 3.22- 2 No Delay Of Mechanical Relay

3.22.1.2 Signals

Table 3.22- 1 MR Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 BI01 Binary Input 01 Of Mechanical Relay
2 BI02 Binary Input 02 Of Mechanical Relay
3 BI03 Binary Input 03 Of Mechanical Relay
4 BI04 Binary Input 04 Of Mechanical Relay

Table 3.22-2 MROutput Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 MRD_Str_BO01 Delay Mechanical Relay Start Signal Of BO01
2 MRD_Str_BO02 Delay Mechanical Relay Start Signal Of BO02
3 MRD_Str_BO03 Delay Mechanical Relay Start Signal Of BO03
4 MRD_Str_BO04 Delay Mechanical Relay Start Signal Of BO04
5 MRD_Op_BO01 Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO01
6 MRD_Op_BO02 Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO02
7 MRD_Op_BO03 Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO03
8 MRD_Op_BO04 Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO04
9 MRND_Op_BO01 No Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO01
10 MRND_Op_BO02 No Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO02
11 MRND_Op_BO03 No Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO03
12 MRND_Op_BO04 No Delay Mechanical Relay Operation Signal Of BO04

3.22.2 Protection Principle

3.22.2.1 Delay Mechanical Protection

Delay mechanical protection, with adjustable delay function, trip through the delay operate
outlet.

162 PRS-778
Protection Functions

Figure 3.22- 3 Logic diagram of MRD Protection

3.22.2.2 Non Delay Mechanical Protection

No delay mechanical protection, direct exit, no delay function, not through the CPU, is completely
hardware loop.

Figure 3.22- 4 Logic diagram of MRND Protection

3.22.3 Settings
Table 3.22- 1 Settings of Reactor interturn Protection

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)

Operating time delay for


1 MRD_BI01Op_T 0.00~99.99 s 0.01 99.99
Delay Mechanical Relay

Operating time delay for


2 MRD_BI02Op_T 0.00~99.99 s 0.01 99.99
Delay Mechanical Relay

Operating time delay for


3 MRD_BI03Op_T 0.00~99.99 s 0.01 99.99
Delay Mechanical Relay

Operating time delay for


4 MRD_BI04Op_T 0.00~99.99 s 0.01 99.99
Delay Mechanical Relay

Logic setting of
enabling/disabling Delay
5 MRD_BI01_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Mechanical Relay
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling Delay
6 MRD_BI02_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Mechanical Relay
0: disable
1: enable

PRS-778 163
Supervision

Values
No. Name Unit Step Default Description
(Range)
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling Delay
7 MRD_BI03_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Mechanical Relay
0: disable
1: enable
Logic setting of
enabling/disabling Delay
8 MRD_BI04_Ena 0/1 - 1 0 Mechanical Relay
0: disable
1: enable

4 Supervision

4.1 Overview
Though the protection system is in non-operating state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without fail.

When the equipment is in energizing process, the equipment needs to be checked to ensure there
are no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the health of the
protection system during startup and normal operation procedure, plays an important role.

The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations has the capability for implementing
this automatic supervision function of the protection system.

In case a fatal fault is detected during automatic supervision, the equipment will be blocked out. It
means that this relay is out of service. Therefore you must re-energize the relay or even replace a
module to make this relay back into service.

4.2 Supervision Alarm and Block

The relay device has powerful real-time self-check capability. The device will automatically check
its own software and hardware running state during the process of operation. If there is any
abnormal situation, the abnormal information will be displayed on the LCD, and the corresponding
indicator and signal relay will issue prompt. Besides, these abnormal self-check and alarm signal
can be uploaded to the SCADA through the IEC 61850 or IEC 60870-103 communication protocol.

Self-check scope of the device is as follows:

1. Self-check about the hardware:


 Alarm signal of analog quantity circuit self-check
 Alarm signal of BI circuit self-check
 Alarm signal of BO circuit self-check

164 PRS-778
Supervision

 Alarm signal of storage self-check


2. Self-check about the software and configuration
 Alarm signal of software running state self-check
 Alarm signal of configuration self-check
 Alarm signal of internal communication self-check
3. Self-check about the external communication
 Alarm signal of external communication self-check
If the relay device is in abnormal status, alarm signal will be issued. Some alarm signals will block
the protection function, while some will not. The detailed information is shown as the following
table.

Table 4.2- 1 Trip Blocking Signal

Alarm Signal Name Description


Kernel Comm Abn Some abnormalityhappen to the internal communication.
Databus Comm Intr Databus communication is interrupted.
Databus Data Abn Some abnormalityhappen to the databus.
LVDSIO Input Err LVDSIO fails to Read BI.
LVDSBus SelfChk Abn LVDS databus is self-detected as abnormal.
RAM Scan Err Some abnormality are found when the RAM is under scan.
Sys Const SelfChk Abn The system constant is self-detected as abnormal.
SelfChk Comp Port Err The communication port isself-detected as abnormal.
SelfChk Comp Cfg Err The communication configuration isself-detected as abnormal.
Setting SelfChk Err The setting CRC code isself-detected as abnormal.
Soft Sw SelfChk Err The soft switch CRC code isself-detected as abnormal.
BO Cfg SelfChk Err The KO configuration file CRC code isself-detected as abnormal.
BO Cfg CRC Err The KO configuration file CRC code is unmatched.
Para SelfChk Err The parameter CRC code isself-detected as abnormal.
Prot Comp RAM Scan Err Some abnormality are found when the BO RAM is under scan.

Table 4.2- 2 Supervision Alarm Signal

Alarm Signal Name Description


Databus LongTime Losing Syn The databus loses synchronization for a long time.
Databus Wrong Syn Alarm Some abnormality happens to the databus synchronization.
A/D Sampling Err A/Dmodule sampling is abnormal.
IRIG-B Syn Abn IRIG-B synchronization is abnormal.
Mana Bus Comm Intr Management databus communication is interrupted.
Set CRC Err The setting CRC code is unmatched.
Soft Sw CRC Err The soft switch CRC code is unmatched.
Para CRC Err The parameter CRC code is unmatched.
Main Cfg Check Abn Themain configuration file isabnormal.
Cfg File Check Abn The configuration file isabnormal.
Comp Cfg Check Err Thecommunication configuration file isself-detected as abnormal.

PRS-778 165
Supervision

Alarm Signal Name Description


WaveRcd Cfg File Abn Thedisturbance configuration file isabnormal.
WaveRcd File Abn The disturbance file isabnormal.

4.3 Current circuit supervision(CTS)


4.3.1 Overview
The main purpose of Current circuit supervision (CTS) is to monitor the protected electrical
network by the help of instrument transformer (CT).This is a backup function for CT circuit failure.
If CT balance coefficient at one side is relatively little, the different current resulting from CT circuit
failure is very small. Therefore, the CT circuit failure alarm can not be issued. The function is used
to prompt the operator to check and confirm whether the CT is normal or not.

The operation principle criteria of Current circuit supervision CT’s based on the following points:

 Three phase zero-sequance current

 Three phase zero-sequence voltage

In addition, the CTS can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or
low-voltage side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

4.3.1.1 Function Block

4.3.1.2 Signals

Table 4.3- 1 CTS Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

7 3U0 Residual voltage from the three-phase voltage inputs

8 3I0 Residual current from the three-phase current inputs

166 PRS-778
Supervision

NO. Signal Description

9 CTS_Blk Block signal of CTS

Table 4.3- 2 CTS Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

9 CTS _Op Operation signal from CTS

4.3.2 Logic Diagram

Figure 4.3- 1 CTS criterion logic diagram

4.3.3 Protection Principle


This is a backup function of CT circuit failure criterion.

Each side of the device is furnished with CT circuit failure alarm element

To prevent incorrect tripping of zero-sequence overcurrent protection caused by CT circuit failure


or anomaly, the device is provided with CT circuit failure judgment element using the following
criterion:

 3I 0  I 0CT

3U 0  U 0CT

Where:

I 0TA and U0TA are respectively internal threshold value of zero-sequence current and

zero-sequence voltage for CT circuit failure judgment element.

CT circuit failure will be deemed to have occurred once the situation that meets above-noted
criterion lasting for 10s.

PRS-778 167
Supervision

4.4 Reactor Current circuit supervision(CTS)


4.4.1 Overview
The main purpose of Current circuit supervision (CTS) is to monitor the protected electrical
network by the help of instrument transformer (CT).This is a backup function for CT circuit failure.
The function is used to prompt the operator to check and confirm whether the CT is normal or not.

4.4.1.1 Function Block

4.4.1.2 Signals

Table 4.4- 1 CTS Input Signals

NO. Signal Description

10 Ua,Ub,Uc three-phase voltage inputs

11 Ia,Ib,Ic three-phase current inputs

12 CTS_Blk Block signal of CTS

Table 4.4- 2 CTS Output Signals

NO. Signal Description

10 CTS _Op Operation signal from CTS

168 PRS-778
Supervision

4.4.2 Logic Diagram

Figure 4.4- 1 CTS criterion logic diagram

4.4.3 Protection Principle

4.5 Fuse failure supervision(VTS)


4.5.1 Overview
The main and important function of Fuse failure supervision (VTS) is to continuously supervised
the protected electrical network by the help of instrument transformer (VT) and to ensure the
stability of accurate operation. If any kind of trouble situation happened in the following circuits
between instrument transformer (VT) and intelligence electronic device (IED), cause many
un-legal operation of protection function are follows:

 Overcurrent protection with voltage controlled element

 Synchronization and many other protections

The operation principle criteria of fuse failure supervision VT’s based on the following points:

PRS-778 169
Supervision

 Negative-sequence voltage is greater than 8V

 Each phase voltage is less than 30V

In addition, the VTS can be configured on the high-voltage side, middle-voltage side or
low-voltage side of the transformer as a backup protection for each side.

4.5.1.1 Function Block

4.5.1.2 Signals

Table 4.5- 1 VTS Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 U3P Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
2 U2 Negative voltage inputs
3 VTS_Blk Block signal of VTS

Table 4.5- 2 VTS Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 VTS_Op Operation signal from VTS

170 PRS-778
Supervision

4.5.2 Logic Diagram

Figure 4.5- 1VTS criterion logic diagram

4.5.3 Protection Principle


Each side of the device is furnished with VT line-break alarm element

In case start-up element fails to activate voltage quantity related protection, VT line-break alarm
signal would be given with a delay of 8s once any of the following conditions is satisfied:

 Voltage at each phase is less than 30V;

 Negative-sequence voltage is greater than 8V.

When voltage switch-on hard strap of some certain side is disabled, VT line-break judgment
function of this side is automatically lifted.

4.6 Reactor Fuse failure supervision(VTS)


4.6.1 Overview
The main and important function of Fuse failure supervision (VTS) is to continuously supervised
the protected electrical network by the help of instrument transformer (VT) and to ensure the
stability of accurate operation. If any kind of trouble situation happened in the following circuits
between instrument transformer (VT) and intelligence electronic device (IED), cause many
un-legal operation of protection function are follows:

 Overcurrent protection with voltage controlled element

 Synchronization and many other protections

The operation principle criteria of fuse failure supervision VT’s based on the following points:

 Negative-sequence voltage is greater than 8V and Negative-sequence current is less then


0.1Ie.

 Each phase voltage is less than 30V and Three-Phase current is between 0.06In and 1.2Ie.

PRS-778 171
Supervision

4.6.1.1 Function Block

4.6.1.2 Signals

Table 4.6- 1 VTS Input Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 Ua,Ub,Uc Three phase group signal for voltage inputs
2 Ia,Ib,Ic Three phase group signal for current inputs
3 VTS_Blk Block signal of VTS

Table 4.6- 2 VTS Output Signals

NO. Signal Description


1 VTS_Op Operation signal from VTS

4.6.2 Logic Diagram

Figure 4.6- 1VTS criterion logic diagram

4.6.3 Protection Principle


Each side of the device is furnished with VT line-break alarm element

172 PRS-778
Monitoring&Control

In case start-up element fails to activate voltage quantity related protection, VT line-break alarm
signal would be given with a delay of 8s once any of the following conditions is satisfied:

 Voltage at each phase is less than 30V and three phase current greater than 0.06In and less
than 1.2Ie;

 Negative-sequence voltage is greater than 8V and Negative-sequence current less than 0.1Ie.

When voltage switch-on hard strap of some certain side is disabled, VT line-break judgment
function of this side is automatically lifted.

5 Monitoring&Control

5.1 Overview
Besides the protection and supervision functions, the relay provides some other auxiliary functions,
such as protection and metering measurement quantities sampling, remote control, BI signaling,
event recording and fault & disturbance recording etc. All these sub-functions are integrated
components to fulfill the protection and control functions of the device.

5.2 Measurement
The general measurement quantities include both directly sampling and calculated quantities.
These quantities are generally used for protection analyzing and metering calculation. All these
quantities can be displayed in the local HMI or transmitted to the PRS IED Studio, SCADA or
dispatching center through network communication.

Through the PRS IED Studio configuration tool, the measurement channels in the transformer
module can be flexibly connected to any measurement quantity according to the designing
requirements.

5.2.1 Protection Sampling


The protection sampling rateis 40 points per cycle. Different protection logics use different
measurement quantities,including the RMS value, the phase angle,the frequency, the harmonic
content, the sequence components and so on. All these protection sampled values are displayed
in HMI with 0.5s updateing rate.

5.2.2 Metering
The metering rate is 40 points per cycle. Different functions, such as controlling, monitoring and
metering, use different measurement quantities, including the RMS value, the phase angle, the
frequency, the harmonic content, the sequence components and so on. All these metering values
are displayed in HMI with 0.5s updateing rate.

PRS-778 173
Monitoring&Control

5.3 Apparatus Control


The apparatus control is a combination of functions which continuously superviseand control the
circuit breakers, switches and earthing switches within a bay.The selection and operation
command to control an apparatus is given after the evaluation of otherfunctions' conditions such
as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator place selectionand the external or internal blockings.

The commands to an apparatus can be initiated from the local self-customized BI, thestation HMI
or the dispatching center. The local control self-customized BIcan be configured on the PRS IED
Studio. The control operation can be started by the activation of the corresponding BI signal. The
remote control command can be remotely dispatched through the network communication like
IEC61850 or DNP.Before executing a remote control command, it is necessary to turn the
Local/Remote control switch to the “Remote” position.

The output relays in the BO module can be configured as output contacts so as tocloseor trip the
apparatus.Each control output can be control with an interlock module (which can be configured
through the PRS IED Studio) if the corresponding interlock logic setting (see Section 7.4.3) is set
to activation.

Figure 5.3- 1 Demonstration Diagram of TheControl Function

5.4 Signaling
This relay has some programmable binary inputs which are used to monitor the contact positions
of the corresponding bay, or be used in protection logics or for releasing or blocking the relevant
protective element, or be used in supervision logics calculation for supervision alarm elements.

The binary inputs can be configured according to the engineering demands through the PRS IED
Studio configuration tool auxiliary software.

The binary input state change confirmation time of each binary input is configurable according to
practical application through the PRS IED Studio configuration tool auxiliary software, and the

174 PRS-778
Monitoring&Control

default binary input state change confirmation time of the binary inputs is 10ms.

5.5 Event Recording


This relay supports the event recording functions which can record all the events happened in
this relay. So it is very convenient for the user to view the history records.

The following event information can be recorded.

• 64 latest protection operation reports

• 1024 latest supervision alarm records

• 1024 latest control operation records

• 1024 latest user operation records

• 1024 latest reports of time tagged sequence of event (SOE)

5.6 Fault and Disturbance Recording


This relay provides the fault and disturbance recording facility for recording the sampled values of
the fault and disturbance wave when a fault is occurred in the power system. The 64 latest fault
and disturbance records can be recorded in this relay, and each wave record includes up to 10000
fault sampled points (40 sampled points per cycle).

The current and voltage sampled values, the binary input signals and the protection operation
signals are contained in the fault and disturbance wave record, and the analog value sampling rate
is 40 points per cycle. The format of the wave complies with the “COMTRADE” standard.

Each waveform includes the wave recording data both before and after the fault. Each trigger
element operation will extend the wave recording time, until the appointed time delay is over after
the trigger element restores, or until the maximum number of wave recording points is reached.

PRS-778 175
IED Hardware

6 IED Hardware

6.1 Overview
The modular design structure of this relay enables a qualified commissioning technician to easily
check and locate the damaged hardware modular, so as to eliminate the fault in the very first time.
The hinged front panel allows easy access to the HMI modules and the back-plugging design
makes it easy to upgrade, maintain or replace any module.

There are several types of hardware modules in this relay, which play different roles in the
practical application. The specific modules can be configurated flexibly according to the practical
engineering demands.

The overall hardware designing frame of this relay is shown as below.

Figure 6.1.1 Hardware Frame of This Relay

The following figures show the front panel and the rear panel of 1/2 19” case and 1/1 19” case.

Figure 6.1.2 Front Panel of 1/2 19” Case

PRS-778 177
IED Hardware

Figure 6.1.3 Front Panel of 1/1 19” Case

178 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Figure 6.1.4Rear Panel of 1/2 19” Case

PRS-778 179
IED Hardware

Figure 6.1.5Real Panel of 1/1 19” Case

NOTICE!

The hardware module configuration in the above figure is only for demonstrating one
kind of typical configuration. Most oftenly, the configuration have to be modified in most
of the project. The hardware module configuration of a practical engineering should be
modified based on the practical designing requirement.

6.2 Hardware Module


The PRS-778 is comprised of randomly coordinated modules, except that a few particular
modules, eg., PWR module, CPU module and HMI module, cannot be replaced in the whole
device. The other modules, including TF(current or voltgage transformer) module and IO (input
and output) module, can be flexibly configured and then placed in the remained slots. The TF
module includes AC current transformer, AC voltage transformer, DC current transformer and etc.
The IO (input and output) module includes binary input, tripping output, signal output and etc.

Table 6- 1Module Configuration

No. ID Module Description Remark

1 SR7910(1/2 19”) Human machine interface module (HMI module) standard

SR7920(1/1 19”)

180 PRS-778
IED Hardware

No. ID Module Description Remark

2 SR7600 Power supply module (PWR module) standard

3 SR7260 Protection calculation module (CPU module) standard

4 SR7271 AD conversion(AD module) standard

5 SR7178 Current/voltage transformermodule (TF module) standard

6 SR7363 Binary input module (BI module) standard

7 SR7360 Binary output module (BO module) standard

8 SR7361 Binary input/output module(IO module) standard

9 SR7776 Mechanical relay module (MR module) option

6.3 Human Machine Interface Module


The human machine interface (HMI) module is installed behind the front panel of this device. It
contains an LCD screen to modify the protection settings and system parametersand display
informations of this device, including the analogue quantities, the running status and event lists.

The menus are showed as tree sturcture, which facilitates the users to enter any specific menu.
After entering the menu, the big LCD show all the relevant information in one screen, making it
easier to get all the information.

6.4 Power Supply Module


The power supply module contains a small voltage converter with enough electrical insulation
between the converter and the input/output terminals. A wide range input voltage is provided due
to the sophisticated circuit design. The the output voltage from the voltage converter are
continuously monitored to ensure the stability and safety.

The power supply module provides 13 binary outputs, some dry contacts, which conduct the signal
functions showing the operating conditions (device error) or tripping and closing commands
(protection, auto-recloser or remote control). The specific function is performed by setting the
relevant settings and wiring the external copper cable.

Except for the Dev_Err Cls and Dev_Err Open output contacts (fixed as indication output contacts),
all the other binary inputs or outputs can be visually and flexibly configured through the PRS IED
Studio configuration tool, which determine what information do they transmit between the CPU
module and PWR module.

The frame of all the power supply module terminal are shown below.

PRS-778 181
IED Hardware

Figure 6.4.1 Frame of the Power Supply Module Terminals

The specific terminal definition of theconnector is described as below.

Table 6- 2 Terminal Definition and Description of PWR Module

Name Description
POW+ Positive input of power supply for the device.
POW- Negative input of power supply for the device.
Dev_Err Common Device abnormality alarm common terminal.
Dev_Err Cls Device abnormality alarm normal close terminal.
Dev_Err Open Device abnormality alarm normal open terminal.
The No.1 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO01
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.2 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO02
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.3 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO03
Specially used for high current interruption.

182 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Name Description
The No.4 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO04
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.5 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO05
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.6 programmable signal,tripping and closing binary output.
BO06
Specially used for high current interruption.
BO07 The No.7 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO08 The No.8 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO09 The No.9 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO10 The No.10 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO11 The No.11 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.

6.5 Main CPU Module


The main CPU module, containing powerful microchip processors and some necessary electronic
accessories, is the core part of this relay. This powerful processor excecute all the functions of the
relay and conduct the commands, including the protection logics, the control function and the
internal and external information interfacing functions.

A high-accuracy crystal oscillator is installed on the module as well, ensuring the relay to operate
exactly based on the accurate current time.

The main functions of the main CPU module includes as below:

 Sampling information processing

The values of each sampling point will be stored and then sent to different processing module
for different function, including display, calculation, communication.

The values of each binary IO contacts will also be stored and then sent to different processing
module for different function, including display, calculation, communication.

 Protection, measuring and metering quantities calculation

The CPU module can calculate all the relevant quantities (zero sequence current and voltage,
negative sequence current and voltage, harmonic quantities of up to 13th) on the basis of the
directly sampling quantities (phase-to-earth voltages and currents, phase-to-phase voltages
andcurrents) and binary inputs. After the calculation, all the quantities are sent to the
protection function module or control module to decide whether the relevant dry contacts trip
or close.

 Communication management

The CPU module can effectively excecute all communication procedures parallelly and
reliably interface coded messages through the selected communication interfaces. These
interfaces are usually used to communicate with a SCADA or a Station Gateway throuth a
switcher. The CPU moduleis also responsible for information exchanging with the HMI module.
If any monitoring conditon changes or any event occurs (SOE, protection tripping event,

PRS-778 183
IED Hardware

device abnormality), this module will send out the relevant event information to all relevant
receivers, so as to ensure a first time alarm to notice the users.

 Auxiliary calculations

Besides all the quantities metioned above, the CPU module can also calculate the metering
values, such as active power, reactive power and power factor, etc., to provide overall
monitoring information. All these quantities can be sent to a SCADA or a Station Gateway
throuth a switcher.

 Time Synchronization

The module provides an interface to receive time synchronized signals from external clock
synchronization source. This module also has a local crystal oscillator to maintain the internal
time accuracy when outside synchronization source breaks down. The synchronization mode
includes PPS (pulse per second) modeand IRIG-B mode. Basing on the outside timing
message (from SCADA or Station Gateway) or the PPS signal or the IRIG-B signal, this
module can adjust its time within the timing accuracy.

The frame of the CPU module terminalis described as below.

184 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Figure 6.5.1 Frame of Main CPU Module

6.6 AD module
The module consists of a 16-bit high-accuracy AD converter which converters the sampling analog
quantities to digital signals channel by channel. After the quick converter, all the digital signalsare
transmitted to microchip processorsfor latter application.

6.7 Transformer Module


The transformer module can decrease the high input analog values to relevant low output analog
values as to the small transformer ratio, acting as an effective isolation between the relay and the
power system. The low output analog values, within the range of the AD module after the
conversion, are sent to the AD module for further processing.A low pass filter circuit is used to
reduce the noise of each analog channel.

PRS-778 185
IED Hardware

The frame of three transformer modules of different specifications are shown below. The first
transformer module consists of 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels. The second one
consists of 4 voltage channels and 8 current channels. The third one consists of 12 current
channels. The current terminal will be automatically short circuited when it is pluged out.

Figure 6.7.1Transformer Module of Three Different Specifications

DANGER!

NEVER allow the secondary side of the current transformer (CT) to be opened while
the primary apparatus is energized. The opened CT secondary circuit will produce a
extremely high voltage and high heat. Although the current terminal will be
automatically short circuited when it is pluged out, the safety precaution should be
obeyed in order to prevent severe personal injury, person death or considerable
equipment damage.

The terminal definition of theconnector is described in the below diagram.

Table 6- 3 Terminal Definition and Description of TF Module 1

Name Description
Ua The three voltage input channels with inner star connection (Y) for
Ub protection and metering.

186 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Name Description
Uc
Un
U1
The phase voltage inputs of line1 for protection and metering.
U1n
U2
The phase voltage inputs of line2 for protection and metering.
U2n
U3
The phase voltage inputs of line3 for protection and metering.
U3n
Ia
Ia’
Ib
The three phase current inputs .
Ib’
Ic
Ic’
Io
The zero sequence current inputs .
Ion’
I1
The phase current inputs of line1.
I1’
I2
The phase current inputs of line2.
I2’

Table 6- 4 Terminal Definition and Description of TF Module 2

Name Description
Ua
Ub The three voltage input channels with inner star connection (Y) for
Uc protection and metering.
Un
U1
The phase voltage inputs of line1 for protection and metering.
U1n
Ia
Ia’
Ib
The three phase current inputs .
Ib’
Ic
Ic’
In
The zero sequence current inputs .
In’
I1
The phase current inputs of line1.
I1’
I2
The phase current inputs of line2.
I2’
I3 The phase current inputs of line3.

PRS-778 187
IED Hardware

Name Description
I3’
I4
The phase current inputs of line4.
I4’

Table 6- 5 Terminal Definition and Description of TF Module 3

Name Description
I1
The phase current inputs of line1.
I1’
I2
The phase current inputs of line2.
I2’
I3
The phase current inputs of line3.
I3’
I4
The phase current inputs of line4.
I4’
I5
The phase current inputs of line5.
I5’
I6
The phase current inputs of line6.
I6’
I7
The phase current inputs of line7.
I7’
I8
The phase current inputs of line8.
I8’
I9
The phase current inputs of line9.
I9’
I10
The phase current inputs of line10.
I10’
I11
The phase current inputs of line11.
I11’
I12
The phase current inputs of line12.
I12’

6.8 Binary Input Module


The BI module contains 18 binary inputs, the optical isolated input terminals, which can perform
different monitoring functions, such as detecting the breaker and switch positions of the
corresponding bay. All the BI terminals can be used as general purpose binary inputs or special
purpose (protection function or control function) binary inputs. For example, the general purpose
binary inputs can be used to indicate the status (0 for normal condition and 1 for abnormal
condition) of a certain apparatus. For another example, the special purpose binary inputs can be
used to acting as the blocking or start signal for a certain protection function.

All the binary inputs can be visually and flexibly configured through the PRS IED Studio

188 PRS-778
IED Hardware

configuration tool, which determine what information do they transmit between the CPU module
and BI module.

The frame of the BI module terminal is described as below.

Figure 6.8- 1Frame of Input Terminal

Table 6- 6 Terminal Definition and Description of BI Module

Name Description
BI01+
BI02+ The No.1 and No.2 programmable binary input.
BI01~ BI02-
BI03+
The No.3 and No.4 programmable binary input.
BI04+

PRS-778 189
IED Hardware

Name Description
BI03~ BI04-
BI05+
The No.5programmable binary input.
BI05-
BI06+
The No.6 programmable binary input.
BI06-
BI07+
The No.7 programmable binary input.
BI07-
BI08+
The No.8 programmable binary input.
BI08-
BI09+
The No.9 programmable binary input.
BI09-
BI10+
BI11+ The No.10 and No.11 programmable binary input.
BI10~ BI11-
BI12+
BI13+ The No.12 and No.13 programmable binary input.
BI12~ BI13-
BI14+
The No.14programmable binary input.
BI14-
BI15+
The No.15 programmable binary input.
BI15-
BI16+
The No.16 programmable binary input.
BI16-
BI17+
The No.17 programmable binary input.
BI17-
BI18+
The No.18 programmable binary input.
BI18-

6.9 Binary Output Module


The BO module consists of 14 binary output,dry contacts, which conduct the signal functions
showing the operating conditions or tripping and closing commands (protection, auto-recloser or
remote control).The specific function is performed by setting the relevant settings and wiring the
external copper cable. All the contacts can independently receive tripping or closing commands
from the main CPU module and then conduct these commands.

All the binary outputscan be visually and flexibly configured through the PRS IED Studio
configuration tool, which determine what information do they transmit between the CPU module
and BO module.

The frame of the BO module terminal is described as below.

190 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Figure 6.9- 1Frame of BO Terminal

Table 6- 7 Terminal Definition and Description of BO Module

Name Description
The No.1 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO1
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.2 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO2
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.3 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO3
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.4 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO4
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.5 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO5
Specially used for high current interruption.
The No.6 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO6
Specially used for high current interruption.
BO7 The No.7 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.

PRS-778 191
IED Hardware

Name Description
BO8 The No.8 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO9 The No.9 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO10 The No.10 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
The No.11 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO11
Normal open and close contacts are both equipped.
The No.12 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO12
Normal open and close contacts are both equipped.
The No.13 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO13
Normal open and close contacts are both equipped.
The No.14 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO14
Normal open and close contacts are both equipped.

6.10 Binary Input/Output Module


The IO module provides 7 binary outputs, some dry contacts, which conduct the signal functions
showing the operating conditions (device error) or tripping and closing commands (protection,
auto-recloser or remote control). The specific function is performed by setting the relevant settings
and wiring the external copper cable.

The IO module also contains 9 binary inputs, the optical isolated input terminals, which can
perform different monitoring functions, such as detecting the breaker and switch positions of the
corresponding bay.All the BI terminals can be used as general purpose binary inputs or special
purpose (protection function or control function) binary inputs.

All the binary inputs and outputs can be visually and flexibly configured through the PRS IED
Studio configuration tool, which determine what information do they transmit between the CPU
module and BO module.

The frame of the IO module terminal definition is described as below.

192 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Figure 6.10- 1Frame of the IO ModuleTerminal

The terminal definition of the IO module is described as below.

Table 6- 8 Terminal Definition and Description of IO Module

Name Description
BI01+
BI02+ The No.1 and No.2 programmable binary input.
BI01~ BI02-
BI03+
BI04+ The No.3 and No.4 programmable binary input.
BI03~ BI04-
BI05+
The No.5programmable binary input.
BI05-
BI06+
The No.6 programmable binary input.
BI06-
BI07+ The No.7 programmable binary input.

PRS-778 193
IED Hardware

BI07-
BI08+
The No.8 programmable binary input.
BI08-
BI09+
The No.9 programmable binary input.
BI09-
BO01 The No.1 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO02 The No.2 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO03 The No.3 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO04 The No.4 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
BO05 The No.5 programmable signal, tripping and closing binary output.
The No.6 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO06
Normal open and close contacts are both equipped.
The No.7 programmable signal, tripping and blocking binary output.
BO07
Normal open and close contacts are both equipped.

6.11 MR Plug-in Module (Mechanical Relay Input/Output)

SR7720 is input and output modules for mechanical protection. This module is used to output

various signals, issue trip commands and accept reset command.

The terminal definition of the connector is described as below.

194 PRS-778
IED Hardware

Terminal definition and description is shown as follows:

Table 6.2-9 Terminal definition and description of MR Plug-in Module


Symbol Description

PWR+ Positive input of power supply for the device

PWR- Negative input of power supply for the device

BI_MR1 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 1

BI_MR2 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 2

BI_MR3 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 3

BI_MR4 Mechanical relay (MR) signal input 4

BO_MR1_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR1 is energized.

BO_MR2_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR2 is energized.

BO_MR3_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR3 is energized.

PRS-778 195
IED Hardware

Symbol Description

BO_MR4_1 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR4 is energized.

Common 1 Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs

BO_MR1_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR1 is energized.

BO_MR2_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR2 is energized.

BO_MR3_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR3 is energized.

BO_MR4_2 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR4 is energized.

Common 2 Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs

BO_MR1_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR1 is energized.

BO_MR2_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR2 is energized.

BO_MR3_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR3 is energized.

BO_MR4_3 NO contact, is closed when binary input BI_MR4 is energized.

Common 3 Common terminal of negative supply of binary inputs

Reset signal Reset input

7 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

7.1 Overview

HMI is known as the Human Machine Interface. HMI is the main communication interface between
the control system and the operator. The friendly LCD facilitates the operator, providing all
operating system information in the screen of the front display panel, including binary inputs or
outputs, circuit breakers status, version of operating system program, alarm signals, tripping
operation, disturbance records, and signal of measuring quantities (voltage, current and angle)
etc., Besides these, its also useful for modifying the operating system configuration settings and
protection function settings as well. The HMI can also be helpful during commissioning work.

Additionally, the PRS IED studio software helps to conduct all above listed function through
communication port (Ethernet cable) on the PC or laptop.

7.1.1 Design Structure


The design structural of PRS-778 Human Machine Interface (HMI) is user friendly and easy to
operate in different situations. The design structure detail of HMI is follow:

 For monitoring the signal status, fault records and configuration of settings, high quality
320×240 dot matrix LCD with dim lite green back light display is equipped.

196 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

 For the access of device functions and control settings. 1 enter and 1 cancel keys, 4
functional keys, 4 arrow keys, 2 remote and local control keys and 2 CB control keys.

 For the indication of different types of alarming and tripping signals. Front panel of HMI
includes 28 LEDs light indicator.

 For the remote access from the PRS IED studio configuration software, Ethernet
commissioning interface is available.

The front and back panels of PRS-778 relay shown in figure 6.1.2 and 6.1.3 respectively.

7.1.2 Function mode


 HMI screen is used to monitor the successively status and information of various events, and
also helps to configure the protection settings and device operating mode

 Navigation menu keys help the operator to locate the required data or information.

 Data record and printing function is available in PRS-778 relay setting.

In simple words, all functions of PRS-778 are user friendly.

7.1.3 Operating panel keypad and keys


The PRS-778 relay front penal have 9 keypads and 8 function keys help the operator to change
the device settings according to the required situation and locate the different kind of data access.
These all keys and keypad have different kinds of functions.

Table 7- 1 Keys information table

Symbol of keys Description

Arrow keys left, right up and down respectively

Functional keys F1, F2, F3 and F4 respectively. These are configure


according to user’s demand.

Different keys like Menu, Clear, Esc and Enter keys

CB close key, Remote/Local control key, User login key and CB opening
key respectively.

PRS-778 197
IED Hardware

Figure 7.1.1 Overview of Front Panel Keypad and Keys

7.1.4 Indication of LED


The PRS-778 device consists of 28 front panel LEDs. The local view of front panel HMI consists of
two protection status LEDs above the display level; healthy and alarm. The sixteen other
configurable LEDs on the front panel of local-HMI and each LEDs can be configured with three
colors like green, red and yellow according to user requirement. These LEDs can be configured
through local HMI or PRS IED Studio. Additionally, sixteen LEDs shows 48 different alarming
status.

198 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Figure 7.1.2 Overview of Front Panel LED’s

Table 7- 2 LED indications

No. Key label Status Description


Off When the device is not energized.
01 Healthy
Green When the device is in normal working mode and ready to operate
Off No alarm signal is energized when the device running normally.
02 Alarm Alarm signal is issued. When any kind of abnormality signal is
Green/Yellow/Red
detected. LED light color is configured according to user demand.
Off None of signal is energized when the device running normally.
These LEDs can be configured according to user demand like
03~18 Configurable
Green/Yellow/Red different operating functions, such as tripping, alarm, reclose, CB
open or close and synchro-check etc.
None of signal is energized when the functional key is
Off
deactivated.
19~22 Configurable
These LEDs indicate the functional keys are deactivated and they
Green/Yellow/Red
can be configured according to user demand.
None of signal is energized when the functional key is
Off deactivated.
23 CB Close
This LED indicate the CB Close key is activated and it can be
Green/Yellow/Red
configured according to user demand.

PRS-778 199
IED Hardware

No. Key label Status Description


Off The operation mode is determined by the BI.
24 Remote
Green/Yellow/Red The device is in the “remote” mode
Off The operation mode is determined by the BI.
25 Local
Green/Yellow/Red The device is in the “Local” mode
Off When user login function is not enable.
26 User login Green When user login function works normally.
Yellow/Red When user login function is not working normally.
None of signal is energized when the functional key is
Off
deactivated.
27 CB Open
This LED indicate the CB Open key is activated and it can be
Green/Yellow/Red
configured according to user demand.
Off When no Ethernet cable is connected with device.
Ethernet Green When it works normally.
28
interface port Alarm signal indication, in case of abnormality. LED color can be
Yellow/Red
configured according to user requirement/demand.

 General description of LEDs indication

Healthy

This LED indication shows, device is energized through normal power supply, and ready to work
under the normal atmosphere.

Alarm

This LED indication shows, when any abnormality alarm is detected in the system.

Trip

This LED indication shows, when any protection function is operated.

Reclose

This LED indication shows, when auto-recloser function is operated.

CB Open

This LED indication shows, when the circuit breaker is in open position.

CB Close

This LED indication shows, when the circuit breaker is in close position.

7.1.5 Configurable keys


The PRS-778 device HMI front panel consists of four configurable keys. These configurable
functional keys provide shortcuts for certain menu or act as a control button. The default view of
configurable functional keys (F1, F2, F3 and F4) are shown in above figure 7.1.1. The detail
operation of functional keys are listed in below table 7.1.3:

200 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Table 7- 3 Information of functional keys

Keys Function Description Remarks


For binary input and output control This control function, control
Control instantiated according to the through three ways like puls,
configuration tool hold and exit.
This shortcut function provide
F1, F2, F3 and "Main menu", "system single line",
easy access to device
F4 "event", "measurement", "fault
Shortcut operation settings and it is
recording", "device status", "clear" 7
configurable according to user
selected 1
demand.
Sign out Do not perform the key function -

7.2 LCD Diplay description of HMI

7.2.1 Ovierview
In this part of HMI, the detail of LCD display function is described.

7.2.2 Normal display structure of LCD


The normal operating condition of local HMI LCD display structure is shown below in figure 7.2.1.

Figure 7.2.1 General Overview Display of Local HMI LCD Screen

According to the overview of local HMI. LCD display is divided into five parts. These parts are
listed below:

1. Main data display zone

2. Outer boundary zone

PRS-778 201
IED Hardware

3. Date and time display zone

4. Time synchronization or GPS

5. Data monitoring zone

Main data display zone provides information that the user wants to access like measurement value
status, fault records, circuit breaker status, single line diagrams, alarm signals, protection function
settings, and synchronization status etc.

Outer boundary zone is known as free text zone and no data display in this zone. It defines the
boundary of LCD display zone.

Date and time display zone shows the real monitoring value of date and time. The user can set
these date and time value according to requirement. The display format of date and time is
yyyy-mm-dd and hh:mm:ss respectively. The time setting format can be easily set to the user time
zone demand.

Time synchronization ….

Data monitoring zone ….

7.2.3 Main menu display


In order to make sure the user can control PRS-778 relay easier, simple and fast, the CYG Co, Ltd
designes a flat-panel of main menu LCD display that contain ten main controlling function.

These controlling function are listed below:

1. Physical

2. Review

3. Monitor

4. Event

5. Record

6. Setting

7. CONFIG

8. Test

9. Clear

10. Language

The main menu display screen shown in below figure 7.2.2. The main menu will deal with the
operation of installation work togetherwith providing basic support and instructions to help user
control.

202 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Figure 7.2.2 LCD General Overview Display of Main Menu

7.3 Sub menu functions of main menu


This part of HMI, the detail of menu sub-functions is described. These all sub-functions display on
the front panel of HMI LCD.

7.3.1 Physical Information


In this section, describe all the physical information related to device software and device
communication. The overview display of physical information is shown in below figure 7.3.1.

Figure 7.3.1 Overview Display of Physical Information Sub-functions

7.3.1.1 Software

In this sub-section of physical information, the software information of the protection relay is
described, including the device type, protection relay software, uniqueness code and protection
date etc. User can access this function through the following path: “Physical information >
software”. The software information data divided into two pages and the detail of information is
listed in below figure 7.3.2 and table 7.3.1:

PRS-778 203
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.2 Overview Display Diagram of Software Information

Table 7- 4 Detail of Software information

Name Function display Description


Device type PRS-XXXX Discribe the type of protection relay
P-Software ver V1.20 Describe the version of protection relay software
P-CRC 3EA9 Protection Cyclic redundancy check code
P-Date yyyy-mm-dd Protection CPU date
M-Software ver. V1.20 MCPU software version
M-CRC 6F3C MCPU Cyclic redundancy check error
M-Date yyyy-mm-dd Management CPU date
Uniqueness code A01-30000000FFFFFFF

7.3.1.2 Communication

This section, describes the information communication of network setting of the protection relay
including IP, MAC and NetMask of network 1, 2 and 3 respectively. User can access this function
through the following path: “Physical information > communication”. The network setting data of
communication information is listed in below figure 7.3.3 and table 7.3.2:

204 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Figure 7.3.3 Overview Display Diagram of Network Setting

Table 7- 5 Communication data detail

Name Function display Description


NET 1 IP 222.111.112.003 IP address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 1
NET 1 MAC 00.00.DE.6F.70.03 MAC address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 1
NET 1 NetMask 255.255.255.000 NetMask address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 1
NET 2 IP 196.005.001.003 IP address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 2
NET 2 MAC 00.01.C4.05.01.03 MAC address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 2
NET 2 NetMask 255.255.255.000 NetMask address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 2
NET 3 IP 196.005.002.003 IP address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 3
NET 3 MAC 00.02.C4.05.02.03 MAC address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 3
NET 3 NetMask 255.255.255.000 NetMask address of internet protocol for Ethernet port 3

7.3.2 Review Information


This section is divided into two sub-parts, including time mode and the information how to review
protection relay monitoring data. This section only provides the setting view display and user can’t
change the display information of relay. The overview display of review information is shown in
below figure 7.3.4.

PRS-778 205
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.4 Overview Display of Review Information Sub-functions

7.3.2.1 Timing Mode

This section, the user can see the time information like Uart IRIG-B, Opti IRIG-B and SNTP
(Simple Network Time Protocol) information and the user can’t change any kind of information.
Users can access this function through the following path: “Review > Timing Mode”. The overview
display of timing mode is shown in below figure 7.3.5.

Figure 7.3.5 Overview Display of Timing Mode

7.3.2.2 Prot Settings

This section is divided into two sub-parts like setting group and protection settings.
1- Setting Group
This sub-section the user can see the information about which group is the current group. There
are totally 4 groups.
2- Prot Settings
This section the user can see the different kind of information like public, measurement and
protection function operation settings etc. User can access this function through the following path:

206 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

“Review > Prot Settings”. This section contains 01 to 11 pages and 42 parts of relay settings. The
information data structure of protection setting is listed in below figure 7.3.6 and table 7.3.3:

Figure 7.3.6 Overview Diagram of Prot Setting (a) Public Setting (b) Measurement Control Setting (c)
Overcurrent Protection Setting (d) Phase Overcurrent Protection Setting of Stage 1

Table 7- 6 Protection settings

Setting No. Functionality Description


This part shows the information of primary and secondary ratio of
01 Public current and voltage respectively. Also shows the value of operating
system frequency.
Known as Measurement control and the user can see the different
information like dead zone values, synchronism values, bus bar rated
02 MEA_CTRL
operating values, angle difference and remote operating values etc.
This part contains into 01-05 pages.
Known as overcurrent protection with voltage element control and the
03 OC_VEC
user can see the relevant setting of OC_VEC in this part.
Known as overcurrent protection 67P (1-4) and user can see the
relevant setting of 67P (1-4) like direction mode, current start value,
04-07 OCTP_67P (1-4)
curve setting parameters, RCA angle and minimum protection
operating time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as non-directional overcurrent protection 51P (1-4) and user
08-11 OCTP_51P (1-4)
can see the relevant setting of 51P (1-4) like multiplier current setting,

PRS-778 207
IED Hardware

Setting No. Functionality Description


current start value, curve setting parameters, reset time and minimum
protection operating time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as non-directional earth fault protection 51G (1-4) and user can
see the relevant setting of 51G (1-4) like current start value, multi
12-15 OCTG-51G (1-4)
current setting, curve setting parameters, reset time and minimum
protection operating time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as directional earth fault protection 67G (1-4) and user can see
the relevant setting of 67P (1-4) like direction mode, RCA angle,
16-19 OCTG_67G (1-4) current start value, multi current setting, curve setting parameters,
3phase zero sequence enable/disable and minimum protection
operating time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as negative sequence current protection 46N and user can see
the relevant setting of 46N like current start value, multi current setting,
20 OCTN_46N
curve setting parameters, minimum protection operating time and reset
time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as phase discontinuity protection 46D and user can see the
relevant setting of 46D like the ratio b/w negative and positive current,
21 OCPD_46D
minimum phase starting current, protection operating time, 46D
enable/disable and reset time etc.
Known as switch onto fault SOTF and user can see the relevant setting
of SOTF like SOTF operating mode and initiating mode, SOTF dead
22 OCT_SOTF line current and voltage, SOTF dead line time, SOTF current and
voltage detection time and SOTF reset time etc. This part contains into
02 pages.
Known as three phase thermal overload protection 49F and user can
see the relevant setting of 49F like the rated current setting of 49F, 49F
23 PTTR_49F
time multiplie, 49F K factor, 49F K trip and alarm setting and 49F trip
and alarm enable/disable etc.
Known as positive sequence undervoltage protection 27P and user
24 UVPR_27P can see the relevant setting of 27P like 27P voltage start setting, 27P
operating time, 27P block voltage setting and 27P enable/disable etc.
Known as circuit breaker failure protection 51BF and user can see the
relevant setting of 51BF like 51BF enable/disable, 51BF retrip
25 RBF_51BF
enable/disable, 51BF operating residual current, 51BF retrip and fail
time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as overfrequency protection 81O (1-2) and user can see the
26-27 OFRS_81O (1-2) relevant setting of 81O (1-2) like 81O operating time, 81O blocking
voltage setting and 81O enable/disable etc.
Known as frequency gradient protection 81R and user can see the
relevant setting of 81O (1-2) like 81R frequency gradient start value,
28 PFRC_81R
81R Negative/positive change in frequency, 81R operating time, 81R
blocking voltage setting and 81R enable/disable etc.
29 OVPR_59P Known as positive sequence overvoltage protection 59P and user can

208 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Setting No. Functionality Description


see the relevant setting of 59P like 59P voltage start setting, 59P
operating time and 59P enable/disable etc.
Known as negative sequence overvoltage protection 59N and user can
30 OVNR_59N see the relevant setting of 59N like 59N voltage start setting, 59N
operating time and 59N enable/disable etc.
Known as residual overvoltage protection 59G and user can see the
31 OVGR_59G relevant setting of 59G like 59G voltage start setting, 59G operating
time and 59G enable/disable etc.
Known as three phase overvoltage protection 59 (1-2) and user can
see the relevant setting of 59 (1-2) like 59 voltage start value, 59
32-33 OVLR-59 (1-2) operating curve setting parameters, 59 time constant multiplier, 59
start phase number, 59 reset time and 59 minimum protection
operating time etc. This part contains into 02 pages.
Known as under frequency protection 81U (1-4) and user can see the
relevant setting of 81U (1-4) like 81U frequency start value, 81U
34 UFRS_81U (1-4)
operating time, 81U voltage blocking value and 81U enable/disable
etc.
Known as underfrequency restore protection 81U and user can see the
relevant setting of 81U like 81U frequency start value, 81U operating
38 UFRE_81U
time, 81U valid duration time of operation, 81U voltage blocking value
and 81U enable/disable etc.
Known as auto-recloser 79 and user can see the relevant setting of 79
like 79 enable/disable, 79 synchronous enable/diable, 79
39 PREC_79 discremination reclosing time for 1 to 5 operation, 79 auto lockout reset
time, 79 recovery delay time after blocking and 79 maximum shots etc.
This part contains into 03 pages.
Known as fuse failure supervision PTS and user can see the relevant
40 ALM_PTS setting of PTS enable/diable, PTS Operate level of pos seq
undervoltage and PTS check mode of PT failure etc.
Known as current circuit supervision CTS and user can see the
41 ALM_CTS relevant setting of CTS enable/diable, CTS current start value and CT
external zero-sequence current calculation criteria disable/enable.
Known as trip circuit supervision TCS and user can see the relevant
42 ALM_TCS
setting of TCS enable/diable and TCS operate time.

7.3.3 Monitoring Information


This section divided into three sub-parts and describe the information of real time monitoring data
of PRS-778 feeder protection relay. This section only provides the sample, harmonics and BI data
information. In this section user can easily access the real-time monitoring data view of relay
through arrow keys. The overview display of monitoring information are shown in below figure
7.3.7.

PRS-778 209
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.7 Overview Display of Monitoring Information Sub-functions

7.3.3.1 Sample

This section divided into one sub part like measurements and describe the detail information of all
measurement values such as current, voltage and angle etc. User can access this function
through the following path: “Monitor > Sample”. This section contains 01 to 04 pages and 36
measuring quantities. The measurement data structure of relay is listed in below figure 2.3.8 and
table 7.3.4:

Figure 7.3.8 Overview Display of Measurement Section Quantities

Table 7- 7 Measurement quantaties

No. Measurment
Value (range) Description
function
1 Ua 0000.00V Phase A measured voltage
2 Ub 0000.00V Phase B measured voltage
3 Uc 0000.00V Phase C measured voltage
4 Ux 0000.00V Ground measured voltage

210 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

No. Measurment
Value (range) Description
function
5 Ia 000.000A Phase A measured current
6 Ib 000.000A Phase B measured current
7 Ic 000.000A Phase C measured current
8 3I0D 000.000A Three phase zero sequence current from external source
9 Uab 0000.00V Phase AB measured voltage (phase to phase measured voltage)
10 Ubc 0000.00V Phase BC measured voltage (phase to phase measured voltage)
11 Uca 0000.00V Phase CA measured voltage (phase to phase measured voltage)
12 Duab/dt 000.000V/S Uab rate of change of voltage
13 Dubc/dt 000.000V/S Ubc rate of change of voltage
14 Duca/dt 000.000V/S Uca rate of change of voltage
15 UxDudt 000.000V/S Ux rate of change of voltage
16 Fr 000.000 Hz Frequency
17 UxFr 000.000 Hz Ux voltage frequency
18 Dfdt 000.000 Hz/S Rate of change of frequency of phase to phase
19 UxDfdt 000.000 Hz/S Rate of change of frequency of Ux voltage
20 U1 0000.00V Positive sequence measured voltage
21 U2 0000.00V Negative sequence measured voltage
22 3U0 0000.00V Calculated Three phase zero sequence voltage
23 I1 000.000A Positive sequence measured current
24 I2 000.000A Negative sequence measured current
25 3I0 000.000A Calculated Three phase zero sequence current
26 UJYa 000.000V
27 UJYb 000.000V
28 UJYc 000.000V
29 MUTIME 000.000 HZ
30 P 0000.00 W Power
31 Q 0000.00 VAR Reactive power
32 S 0000.00 VA Apparent power
33 COS 000.00 Cos value
34 DU 000.00V Vlotage difference
35 DF 000.000Hz Frequency difference
36 DA 000.00° Angle difference

7.3.3.2 Harmonic

In this section, the user can see the calculated harmonic content data list of all phase voltage and
current and also the RMS value of all three phase voltage and current. User can access this
function through the following path: “Monitor > Harmonic”. The harmonic overview display diagram
of relay is listed in below figure 7.3.9. After the measurement channel is selected, the harmonic
data of the channel can be viewed.

PRS-778 211
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.9 LCD Display Diagram (a) Overview of Entrance Harmonic Monitoring Chart (b) Ua Harmonic
Content Display Chart of Page 1

7.3.3.3 BI

This section divided into two sub-parts and describe the information of binary input (BI) of this IED
seen in the above figure 7.3.5. This section only display all the binary input data. User can access
this function through the following path: “Monitor > BI”.
1- BI
This part of single BI monitoring data contains 01 to 04 pages and 32 binary inputs. The BI display
diagram of the IED is listed in below figure 7.3.10 (a):

2- D-BI

D-BI is stand for double binary input function. The D-BI display diagram of relay is listed in below
figure 7.3.10 (b):

Figure 7.3.10 LCD Display Diagram of (a) BI Monitored Data (b) D-BI Monitored Data

7.3.4 Event Information


This section is divided into four sub-section and describe the information of all events, like fault

212 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

events, alarming information (warning records), selfchk info, SOE, remote control, user records
and power records etc. The LCD display event diagram of the IED is listed in below figure 7.3.11:

Figure 7.3.11 Overview Display of Event Information Sub-functions

7.3.4.1 Port Records

This section divided into one sub-function like fault events and this device can store 1024 latest
protection records. User can access this function through the following path: “Event > Port
Records”. The detail of this section divided into nine points:

1. Shows date and time

2. Protection function status

3. Shows operation of protection function like which protection function is acted.

4. Shows operated phases information

5. Shows fault clearance delay time

6. Shows slot info like management slot (slot3) or protection slot (slot9).

7. Shows fault number

8. Not reverted

9. Shows fault events page number information, it will be increase or decrease w.r.to numbers of
fault.

The diagram of fault event display of relay is listed in below figure 7.3.12:

PRS-778 213
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.12 Overview Display of Fault Events

7.3.4.2 Alarm Records

This section divided into two sub-functions like warning records and selfchk Info see figure 7.3.11.
This devise can save latest 1024 alarm records.

1- Warning Records

In this section user can see all warning records like protection warning records and TimingErr
warning records etc. User can access this function through the following path: “Event > Alarm
Records”. The overview display of warning record is shown in below figure 7.3.13.

Figure 7.3.13 Overview Diagram of Warning Records Info

2- Selfchk Info

214 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

The self-check info checks the communication status between devices, such as carrier channel
abnormality, fiber channel abnormality, GOOSE communication abnormality and internal AD
sampling abnormality and etc. To summarise, this device also check hardware, software and
configuration file and it can totally save latest 1024 records. User can access this function through
the following path: “Event > Alarm Records”. The overview display of SelfChk info is shown in
below figure 7.3.14.

Figure 7.3.14 Overview Display Diagram of SelfChk Info

7.3.4.3 SOE

In this section SOE checks following condition:

 When the state of binary input signal changes, eg. a hard contact, the time tag of the state
quantity is marked by the device and the time is defined after debouncing.

 When the state of GOOSE signal changes, the time tag of the state quantity adopts the
external input source signal time tag. The GOOSE signal acquisition has no debouncing time.

User can access this function through the following path: “Event > SOE”. This device can save
1024 latest SOE records. The diagram of SOE record is shown in below figure 7.3.15.

PRS-778 215
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.15 Overview Display Diagram of SOE

7.3.4.4 Dev Logs

This section divided into three sub-function like remote control, user records and power records
see figure 7.3.11.

1- Remote Control

This part shows the remote control signals like circuit breaker, disconnector, reset signal,
transformer tap changer, earthing switches etc. The recorded information includes the command
source, command time, operation result and failure reason etc. This device can store 1024 latest
remote control records. User can access this function through the following path: “Event > Dev
Logs”. The diagram of remote control functions are shown in below figure 7.3.16.

Figure 7.3.16 Overview Display Diagram of Remote Control Access

2- User Records

216 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

In this section user can see the setting of user reocrds with slot number, time and date. User can
access this function through the following path: “Event > Dev Logs”. The diagram of user records
are shown in below figure 7.3.17.

Figure 7.3.17 Overview Diagram of User Records

3- Power records

In this section user can see the setting of power records date and time with energizing and
dis-energizing slot number. The number of pages of this section can be increase or decrease
through the storage of power records. User can access this function through the following path:
“Event > Dev Logs”. The diagram of power record is shown in below figure 7.3.18.

Figure 7.3.18 Overview Diagram of Power Records

7.3.5 Record Information


In this section, user can see the disturbance records and this section is divided into one
sub-section. The diagram of disturbance record is shown in below figure 7.3.18.

PRS-778 217
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.19 Overview Display of Records Information

7.3.5.1 Fault wave

In this section user can see the disturbance records of all the faults. User can access this function
through the following path: “Disturbance Records > Fault Wave”. The diagram of faulty wave
records are shown in below figure 7.3.20.

Figure 7.3.20 Overview Diagram of Fault Wave List

7.3.6 Setting Information


This section divided into two sub-section like set group and protection settings. In this part user
can set the device configuration according to operation demand. The overview display of setting
information is shown in below figure 7.3.21.

218 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Figure 7.3.21 Overview Display of Setting Information Sub-functions

7.3.6.1 Set Group

This sub-section is divided into two further sub-section like Set Grp change and Grp Copy and in
this part user can change the group setting.

1- Set Grp change

This device has four setting groups and user can easily configure the group setting according to
operation demand. This setting is divided into four steps. User can access this function through
the following path: “Setting > Set group”. The procedure of group setting change is explaining in
below figure 7.3.22.

Firstly, enter the device login password. Secondly, select group setting. Thirdly, download new
configuring setting. Fourthly, cancel to return back or exit.

PRS-778 219
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.22 Procedure Diagram of Group Setting Change

2- Grp Copy

This device has four setting groups and user can easily copy one group settings and save this
same setting in other group. User can access this function through the following path: “Setting >
Set group”. The procedure detail of group setting copy is explaining in below figure 7.3.23.

Figure 7.3.23 Procedure Diagram of Group Setting Copy

220 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

7.3.6.2 Prot Settings

In this section user can change the different kind of information like public, measurement and
protection operation function settings etc. This section contains 01 to 11 pages and 42 parts of
relay settings. User can access this function through the following path: “Setting > Prot Settings”.
The detail of protection setting is listed in above table 7.3.3 and below figure 7.3.24:

Figure 7.3.24 Diagram of Protection Setting

7.3.7 Configuration Information


This section divided into two sub-function like time and authorization. In this part user can set the
device date and time according to the time zone of certain country. Besides that, the monitoring
and controlling authorization of different users (of different post) can also be modified. The
diagram of configuration information is shown in below figure 7.3.25.

PRS-778 221
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.25 Overview Display of Configuration Information Sub-functions

7.3.7.1 Time

This part is divided into two sub-section date & time and time zone see figure 7.3.25. User can
access this function through the following path: “Configuration > Time”.

1- Date and time

In this section user can easily set date and time according to practical demand. See figure 7.3.26
(a):

2- Time zone

In this section user can easily set time zone according to their region. See figure 7.3.26 (b):

Figure 7.3.26 Diagram of (a) Date & Time Setting (b) Time Zone Setting

7.3.7.2 Authorization

This part is divided into one sub-function. see figure 7.3.24. User can access this function through
the following path: “Configuration > Authorization”.

1- User

222 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

In this section user can easily set relay operator setting like operator 1 or 2 or guest 1. See below
table 7.3.5 and figure 7.3.27:

Table 7- 8 User setting detail

User operator selection options Authorization


The manufacturer user has all the configuration functions of
access to device setting. At the same time, only the
manufacturer's user has the access to hide, read, and write
(display) to the logical device LD, logical component LN and
logical component data item DO of 61850 protocol and logical
picture subgraph. Therefore, as to realize the manufacturer's
Manuf basic configuration of the device and not be suitable for
opening up the correlation. The content settings for users are
hidden and should not be opened to users to modify, but the
contents they need to view are set to read-only.
Note!
Non of other users have access to this setting function except
manufacturer.
The engineering user staff account has all the general access
of configuration (view and modification) functions of the
configuration tool, including drawing logical pictures, main
wiring diagrams etc.
Note!
Engin_1 In this user login section, user cannot create an account
configuration of the configuration device setting.
1) The engineering account can only view and modify
its own password.
2) This account automatically withdraws or logoff
after 30 minutes without operation.
The operator user account, grnerally it can only view the
configuration of the device, the logical picture, wiring diagram
Oper_1 & Oper_2 and the logical device component. In this section user can’t
create and modify any of its configuration, such as moving the
map element position and deleting port association etc.
Guest user account is only for visitors. In this section user
Guest_1 have no rights to change or view any kind of configuration
information.

PRS-778 223
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.27 Diagram of Authorization User (a) Operator Selection List (b) Login or Cancel

7.3.8 Test Information


This section is divided into three sub-parts. In this section user can check the testing accuracy of
relay like tripping test, signal test, operation test, warning test, block test, measurement test and
mandatory wave etc. The overview display diagram of test information is shown in below figure
7.3.28:

Figure 7.3.28 Overview Display of Test Information Sub-functions

7.3.8.1 Output Test

Output test is divided into two sub-test like tripping test and signal test. See figure 7.3.27. User can
access this function through the following path: “Test > Output Test”.
1- Trip Test
In this section user can simulate different trip signal, but the tripping simulation can only be
conducted when the IED is under maintenance. see below figure 7.3.29 (a):
2- Signal Test
In this section user can simulate all kind of signal test like operation signal, alarm signal and signal
reset. see below figure 7.3.29 (b):

224 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Figure 7.3.29 Overview Diagram of (a) Trip Test (b) Signal Test

7.3.8.2 Comm Test

Common test is divided into six sub-test like operation test, warning test, block test, SelfChk test,
measure test and status test, etc. User can access this function through the following path: “Test >
Comm Test”. The LCD overview display diagram of common test information of every tests is
shown in below figure 7.3.30.

PRS-778 225
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.30 LCD Display Diagram of (a) Operation Test (b) Warning Test (c) Block Test (d) SelfChk Test (e)
Measurement Test (f) Status Test

1- Operation Test
In this section user can simulate the peotection operation event like 51P, 51G and 67P operation
function etc. see above figure 7.3.30 (a):
2- Warning Test
In this section user can simulate the warning event like thermal alarm, breaker failure alarm and
PTS alarm etc. see above figure 7.3.30 (b):

226 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

3- Block Test
In this section user can simulate the tripping block event like data bus common interrupt blocking
function, data bus Err blocking function, A/D Sam quality Err, A/D SelfChk Err, LVDSIO Read Err,
parameter CRC Chk Err and core common data bus abnormal blocking function test etc. see
above figure 7.3.30 (c):
4- SelfChk Test
In this section user can simulate the SlefChk event like data bus common interrupt SelfChk
function, core common data bus abnormal SelfChk function test, relay interface Chk err, initial Cfg
err and Cfg (configuration) file number abnormal SelfChk test etc. see above figure 7.3.30 (d):
5- Measurement Test
In this section user can simulate the measurement values like voltage and current of phase A, B &
C, zero sequence voltage and current, frequency and angle etc. see above figure 7.3.30 (e):
6- Status Test
In this section user can simulate the BI changing status, like reset, remote, CB close or open, CBF,
TCS, SOTF start and BI open or close etc. see above figure 7.3.30 (f):

7.3.8.3 Mandatory Wave

In this section user can check the mandatory wave function. User can access this function through
the following path: “Test > Mandatory wave”. After enter this section user can manually start
disturbance recording in disturbance record section. See figure 7.3.20 (fault wave):

7.3.9 Clear Information

Figure 7.3.31 Overview Display of Clear Information Sub-functions

7.3.9.1 Clear record

In this section user can clear the record history of different functions like Alarm record, LED record
and act record etc. User can access this function through the following path: “Clear > Clear record”.
The clear record structure of LCD display is listed in below figure 7.3.32:

PRS-778 227
IED Hardware

Figure 7.3.32 Diagram of Clear Record Display

7.3.10 Language Information

Figure 7.3.33 Overview Display of Language Information Sub-functions

7.3.10.1 Language Setting

In this section user can set the IED language according to their demand like Chinese, English,
Hindi, German and Russian etc. User can access this function through the following path:
“Language > Language setting”. The language setting diagram of relay is listed in below figure
7.3.34:

228 PRS-778
HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

Figure 7.3.34 LCD Display diagram of Language Setting

PRS-778 229
Configurable Function

8 Configurable Function

8.1 General Description


The IED is equipped with flexible and powerful configuration funtions, including the system
configuration, the protection function configuration, the binary input configuration, the binary
output configuration and the LED indicator configuration through the auxiliary software, which
makes this IED meet various practical requirements.

8.2 Introduction of PRS IED StudioSoftware


The PRS IED Studio software is developed in order to meet customer's demand on functions of
the UAPC platform device, such as device configuration and programmable design. It selects
substation as the core of data management and the device as fundamental unit, supporting one
substation to supervise many devices.

The software provides two kinds of operation modes: on-line mode and off-line mode. The on-line
mode supports the Ethernet connection with the device through the standard IEC60870-5-103 and
can be capable of uploading and downloading the configuration files through Ethernet net; the
off-line mode supports the off-line setting configuration, including protection logic programming,
the binary input configuration, the binary output configuration and etc.

9 Communication Protocol

9.1 Overview
This chapter introduces the data communication and the corresponding hardware of the IEDs. The
IED support a wide range of protocols via communication interface (RS-485 or Ethernet port).The
protocols are of international standard for communication in substations andit can be selected by
modifying the communicationparameters.

Local communication with the IED via a computer is achievable throught both the front and back
Ethernet ports. Furthermore, remote communication with SCADA or the station gateway is also
achievable by choosing the IEC60870-5-103, IEC61850, DNP3.0 communication protocol via
RS485 or Ethernet port.

It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this chapter do not aim to fully detail the
protocol itself. This section serves to describe the specific implementation of the protocol in the
relay.

9.2 Rear Communication Interface


9.2.1 Ethernet Interface
This protective device can provide three rear Ethernet interfaces (optional) and they are
unattached each other. Parameters of each Ethernet port can be configured in the menu.

230 PRS-778
Communication Protocol

9.2.1.1 Ethernet Standardized Communication Cable

It is recommended to use twisted screened eight-core cable as the communication cable. A picture
is shown bellow.

Figure 9.2.1 Ethernet communication cable

9.2.1.2 Ethernet Communication protocol

Ethernet communication protocols are supported by the device including: IEC60870-5-103, PRP,
RSTP, DNP3.0, IEC61850 etc. For more details about these communication protocols, see the
correlative standards.

9.3 Network Topoloty


9.3.1 Star Topology
Each equipment is connected with an exchanger via communication cable, and thereby it forms a
star structure network. Dual-network is recommended in order to increase reliability. SCADA is
also connected to the exchanger and will play a role of master station, so the every equipment
which has been connected to the exchanger will play a role of slave unit.

9.3.2 PRP Topology


This network topoloty is supported by the device.

9.3.3 RSTP Topology


This network topoloty is supported by the device.

9.4 IEC61850Protocol
9.4.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard is the result of years of work by electric utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. IEC 61850 is a series of standards
describing client/server and peer-to-peer communications, substation design and configuration,
testing, environmental and project standards. The complete set includes:

 IEC 61850-1: Introduction and overview

 IEC 61850-2: Glossary

 IEC 61850-3: General requirements

 IEC 61850-4: System and project management

PRS-778 231
Communication Protocol

 IEC 61850-5: Communications and requirements for functions and device models

 IEC 61850-6: Configuration description language for communication in electrical substations


related to IEDs

 IEC 61850-7-1: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Principles and models

 IEC 61850-7-2: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment - Abstract
communication service interface (ACSI)

 IEC 61850-7-3: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Common data classes

 IEC 61850-7-4: Basic communication structure for substation and feeder equipment–
Compatible logical node classes and data classes

 IEC 61850-8-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Mappings to MMS (ISO
9506-1 and ISO 9506-2) and to ISO/IEC 8802-3

 IEC 61850-9-1: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
serial unidirectional multidrop point to point link

 IEC 61850-9-2: Specific Communication Service Mapping (SCSM) – Sampled values over
ISO/IEC 8802-3

 IEC 61850-10: Conformance testing

These documents can be obtained from the IEC (http://www.iec.ch). It is strongly recommended
that all those involved with any IEC 61850 implementation obtain this document set.

9.4.2 Communication Profiles


The PRS-7000 series relay supports IEC 61850 server services over TCP/IP communication
protocol stacks. The TCP/IP profile requires the PRS-7000 series to have an IP address to
establish communications.

9.4.2.1 MMS protocol

IEC 61850 specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper
(application) layer for transfer of real-time data. IEC 61850-7-2 abstract services and objects are
mapped to actual MMS protocol services in IEC61850-8-1.

9.4.2.2 Client/server

The core ACSI defined by IEC 61850 is mapped to manufacturing message specifications (ISO
9506-1, ISO 9506-2). This is a connection-oriented type of communication. The connection is
initiated by the client, and communication activity is controlled by the client.

The rules to map the ACSI services supported by PRS-7000 series units to the MMS are as shown
in following table

232 PRS-778
Communication Protocol

Table 9- 1 Mapping of ACSI to MMS service

ACSI MMS
GetNameList (read name list
Server model GetServerDirectory (read server directory)
service)
Associate (associate) Initiate (initial service)
Associate model Abort (abnormal abort) Abort (abort service)
Release (release) Conclude (end service)
GetLogicalDeviceDirectory (read logic device GetNameList (read name list
Logic device model
directory) service)
GetLogicalNodeDirectory (read logic node GetNameList (read name list
Logic node model directory) service)
GetAllDataValues (read all data value) Read (read service)
GetDataValues (read data value) Read (read service)
SetDataValues (set data value) Write (write service)
GetVariableAccessAttribute
GetDataDirectory (define read data) (read variable access attribute
Data model
service)
GetVariableAccessAttribute
GetDataDefinition (read data directory) (read variable access attribute
service)
GetDataSetValue (read data set value) Read (read service)
SetDataSetValue (set data set value) Write (write service)
DefineNamedVariableList
CreateDataSet (establish data set)
(define named variable list service)
Data set model DeleteNamedVariableList
DeleteDataSet (delete data set)
(delete named variable list service)
GetNamedVariableListAttribute
GetDataSetDirectory (read data set directory) (read named variable list attribute
service)
SetDataValues (set data value) Write (write service)
Substituting model
GetDataValues (read data value) Read (read service)
SelectActiveSG (select activating setting group) Write (write service)
SelectEditSG (select edit setting group) Write (write service)
SetSGValues (set setting group value) Write (write service)
Setting group control ConfirmEditSGValues (confirm editting setting
Write (write service)
block model group value)
GetSGValues (read setting group value) Read (read service)
GetSGCBValues (read setting group control block
Read (read service)
value)
Report (report) InformationReport (information report)
Buffered report control GetBRCBValues (read buffered report control
Read (read service)
block block value)
SetBRCBValues (set buffered report control block Write (write service)

PRS-778 233
Communication Protocol

value)
Report (report) InformationReport (information report)
GetURCBValues (read non-buffered report control
Non-buffered report Read (read service)
block value)
control block
SetURCBValues (set non-buffered report control
Write (write service)
block value)
GetLCBValues (read log control block value) Read (read service)
SetLCBValues (set log control block value) Write (write service)
Log control block
QueryLogByTime (query log by time) ReadJournal (read log service)
model
QueryLogAfter (query log after) ReadJournal (read log service)
GetLogStatusValues (read log status values) Read (read service)
GetGoCBValues (read GOOSE control block
Read (read service)
values)
GOOSE
SetGoCBValues (set GOOSE control block
Write (write service)
values)
GetGsCBValues (read GSSE control block values) Read (read service)
GSSE
SetGsCBValues (set GSSE control block values) Write (write service)
GetMSVCBValues (read MSV control block
Read (read service)
MSV values)
SetMSVCBValues (set MSV control block values) Write (write service)
GetUSVCBValues (read USV control block
Read (read service)
USV values)
SetUSVCBValues (set USV control block values) Write (write service)
Select (select ) Read (read service)
SelectWithValue (select with value) Write (write service)
Cancel (cancel) Write (write service)
Control model
Operate (operate) Write (write service)
CommandTermination (command termination) InformationReport (information report)
TimeActivatedOperate (time activated operation) Write (write service)
FileOpen, FileRead, FileClose
GetFile (read file) (file open, file read and file close
File transmission service sequence)
model SetFile (set file) ObtainFile (obtain file service)
DeleteFile (delete file) FileDelete ( file delete service)
GetFileAttributeValues (read file attribute values) FileAttributes (file attribute service)

9.4.2.3 Peer-to-peer

This is a non-connection-oriented, high speed type of communication usually between substation


equipment, such as protection relays, intelligent terminal. GOOSE is the method of peer-to-peer
communication.

234 PRS-778
Communication Protocol

9.4.2.4 Substation configuration language (SCL)

IEC 61850 has defined a series of configuration documents (ICD, IID, SCD, SED, CID), which are
prepared with SCL (substation configuration language). The SCL includes the following:

Head: it is used to identify a SCL configuration document and its version, and also to designate
relevant names into the mapping option of information (FuntionName)

Substation: it is used to describe the function structure of the substation, and mark the primary
devices and their electrical connection relationship.

IED: intelligent electronic device description, to describe the IED pre-configuration, access points,
logic devices, logic nodes, data objects, etc.

DataTypeTemplate: the instantiated logic node type, and logic node type is a specific sample of
logic node data.

The purpose to define and use SCL is: the description of intelligent electronic device capability and
description of substation automation system can be exchanged in a compatible manner between
the intelligent electronic device management tools and system configuration tools provided by
different manufacturers.

9.4.2.5 GOOSE

GOOSE service is used to transmit fast messages, such as trip and switch position.

The GOOSE service adopts the pear-to-pear transmission, and is classified as GOOSE sending
and GOOSE receiving.

9.4.2.6 GOOSE sending mechanism

GOCB is automatically enabled when the unit is powered on, when all status of the unit are
determined, it performs sending according to the data set shifting mode, to quickly send the initial
status of the own GOOSE information;

The time interval for immediate re-sending after shift of GOOSE message is the MinTime
parameter (i.e. T1); the “timeAllowedtoLive” parameter in GOOSE message is 2 times the
“MaxTime” configuration parameter (i.e. 2T0);

9.4.2.7 GOOSE receiving mechanism

The GOOSE receiving buffer zone of the unit receives the new GOOSE messages, after a strict
check of the relevant parameters of GOOSE messages, the receiving side first compares if the
StNum (status number) of the newly received frame and that in the GOOSE message of the
previous frame are equal. If the StNum of the two frames of GOOSE messages are equal, the
SqNum (sequence number) of the two frames of GOOSE messages are compared, if the SqNum
of the newly received GOOSE frame is bigger than the SqNum of the previous frame, this GOOSE
message is discarded, otherwise the data of the receiving side is updated. If the two GOOSE
messages have different StNum, the data of the receiving side are updated;

PRS-778 235
Communication Protocol

When receiving GOOSE messages, the PRS-7000 series unit strictly checks if parameters such
as AppID, GOID, GOCBRef, DataSet and ConfRev are matching;

In receiving GOOSE messages, it will take into account cases of communication interruption of
fault with issuing unit, when the GOOSE communication is interrupted or the configured versions
are not identical, the received GOOSE message should maintain the status before interruption.

9.4.3 Data set and control block


PRS-7000 series devices support real-time sending of data. The data objects requiring real-time
monitoring are configured into data set, and the data set are associated to report control and
GoCB, so that the change information of monitored objects can be sent in real-time to the
background via the report service and GOOSE.

9.4.3.1 Data set

PRS-7000 series devices usually configure data sets in advance in the ICD document, such as
protection event, protection digital input and protection measurement. The SCT (system
configuration tool) can also add, delete and modify data set configuration according to the needs
of existing actual projects.

A data set is an ObjectReference set of orderly DATA or DataAttrubutes. It usually include the
following attributes:

 ldInst: the logic device containing the DATA or DataAttrubutes;


 lnClass: the logic node class containing the DATA or DataAttrubutes;
 lnInst: the logic node instant number containing the DATA or DataAttrubutes;
 Fc: all attributes of functional constraint required by DATA or DataAttrubutes;
 doName: name of DATA, or name belonging to the DataAttrubutes;
 daName: attribute name.

9.4.3.2 Report control block

IEC 61850 has defined the report control block, to describe how the changed information is
actively submitted via report service when the data set members have changed. Report control
blocks are classified into buffered report control block and non-buffered report control block. In
case of communication interruption, the newly occurring event will still be stored as buffered report
control block, otherwise, it is a non-buffered report control block.

The report control block performs the control of report submission via a series of attribute
configurations. Specifically, it has the following important attributes:

RptID

The identity of report control block, globally unique within the scope of LD, if the RptID of the RCB
is set by the client side as NULL, in the report submitted by device, RptID is full path.

OptFlds

236 PRS-778
Communication Protocol

The option fields OptFlds contained in the report. The PRS-7000 series device supports the
following option fields:

- Bit 1: Sequence-number
- Bit 2: Report-time-stamp
- Bit 3: Reason-for-inclusion
- Bit 4: Data-set-name
- Bit 5: Data-reference
- Bit 7: EntryID (for buffered reports only)
- Bit 8: Conf-revision

- Bit 9: Segmentation

When an item is set as 1, the corresponding information will be embodied in the report.

DatSet

The name of the data set associated with the report control block and under the same LD. The
members of this data set are monitored by this report control block.

BufTm

Buffer time, it is the buffer time internally prompted by the dchg (data change), qchg (quality
change), and dupd (data updating) of the rcb, in ms, with missing value as 0, indicating not using
the buffer time attribute, and the maximum value is 1h.

The timer is started when the first internal prompt arrives, after it is reached in timer, all event
messages within the buffer time are packed into one report, and submitted to the client side.

When the second change of the same signal arrives in the buffer time, the buffered report is
submitted immediately, and the timer is booted again, to start again the subsequent internal
prompt buffer.

TrgOps

Trigger option, used to filter the conditions for sending reports. PRS-7000 supports the following
trigger options:

-Bit 1: Data change

- Bit 2: Quality change

- Bit 3: Data updating (the service follow-up of Ed2)

- Bit 4: Completeness period

- Bit 5: Total call

IntgPd

Completeness period time, to be set by the client side. After successful device enabling (RptEna =
TRUE), the timer is started immediately, and after the expiration of completeness period time, the
current values of all members in the data set associated by the report are packed and submitted.

The completeness period time set as 0 means the completeness submission function is not
enabled.

PRS-778 237
Communication Protocol

GI

Total call is launched by the client side with initiative. After the report is enabled, the client side
takes initiative to issue GI = TRUE, then the device immediately submit all data values in the
current data set.

PurgeBuf

Purge buffer. When the client side sets PurgeBuf = TRUE, all report entries in the IED buffer report
are purged.

When the client side modifies RptID, DataSet, BufTime, TrgOps, IntgPd, the device will
automatically set purging buffer reports, equivalent to setting PurgeBuf = TRUE.

9.4.3.3 GOOSE control block

The fast messages of the PRS-7000 series device is transmitted via GOOSE, and the
transmission characteristics of GOOSE is controlled by the GOOSE control block (GoCB). GoCB
has the following important characteristics:

App ID

The application ID, representing the logic device where the GoCB is located. The missing value of
App ID is the Object Reference of GoCB.

DatSet

The values of members of the data set associated by GoCB are transmitted by GOOSE.

9.4.4 Logic nodes and data modeling

9.4.4.1 Logic nodes

IEC 61850 7-4 has defined a series of logic nodes, which constitute the minimum communication
unit of intelligent electronic devices as classified by functions. There are three types of logic nodes
used by the PRS-7000 series unit: management logic nodes (LLN0), physical device logic nodes
(LPHD) and application function logic nodes.

LLN0

Management logic nodes provide the management and control functions for all logic nodes and
data objects within the logic devices. Some common services are modeled in LLN0, such as
setting group control block (SGCB), GOOSE control block (GoCB), SV control block (MsvCB),
reported control block (BRCB and URCB) and log control block (LCB); some common data objects
are modeled in this node, such as Loc, to represent the local and remote operation enabling of the
unit, and the based function VEBI and common settings; some data objects represent the
meaning of the whole logic device, such as Beh, it is jointly formed by the Beh value of all logic
nodes in the logic device, to represent the behavior and status of the whole logic device.

LPHD

238 PRS-778
Communication Protocol

It represents the information of physical devices, including the device manufacturer, unit model,
software version, unit serial No., if it has an agency and the device health status. In this logic node,
it is also extended to include device information such as name of protected device and unit time
calibration method.

Application function logic nodes


Application function logic nodes include when classified by functions:
A: automatic control logic nodes
C: monitoring related logic nodes, such as CSWI
G: general purpose function logic nodes, such as GGIO, GAPC
I: filing related logic nodes,
M: measurement and metering related logic nodes, such as MMXU
P: protection function logic nodes, such as PDIF, PDIS, PTOC, PTRC
R: protection related functional logic nodes, such as RREC, RBRF
S: sensors, monitoring
T: instrument transducer logic nodes, such as TVTR, TCTR
X: switching device logic nodes, such as XCBR, XSWI
Y: power transformer and related function logic nodes

PRS-7000 series unit uses the corresponding logic nodes according to the functions selected by
user. For the corresponding logic nodes, please refer to the instruction manual for unit of the
specific model.

9.4.4.2 Data object

IEC 61850 7-3 defined common data types, including:

 Status information: such as SPS, INS, ACT, ACD


 Measured value information: such as MV, CMV, WYE
 Controllable status information: such as SPC, INC, DPC
 Status set values: such as SPG, ING
 Analog set values: such as ASG
 Description information: such as LPL, DPL

The PRS-7000 series unit uses the above common data types, and instantiate the specific data
objects according to the need of application functions, to meet the need of application functions.
There are the following common data objects in all logic nodes (except for LPHD):

Mod

The model of logic node. It represents the behavior mode of the logic node, such as normal,
testing and blocked.

Beh

PRS-778 239
Communication Protocol

The performance of the logic node, representing the current performance status of the logic node,
the value of the same Mod is read-only and cannot be modified.

Health

Health status, it reflects the status of the relevant software and hardware of the logic node.

NamPlt

The name plate of the logic node

9.5 DNP3.0 Protocol


9.5.1 Overview
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany this relay. The DNP3.0 protocol is not
described here; please refer to the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the DNP3.0
implementation. This manual only specifies which objects, variations and qualifiers are supported
in this relay, and also specifies what data is available from this relay via DNP3.0.

The DNP3.0 communication uses the Ethernet ports (electrical or optical) at the rear side of this
relay.

9.5.2 Link Layer Functions


Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the linker layer functions.

9.5.3 Transport Functions


Please see the DNP3.0 protocol standard for the details about the transport functions.

9.5.4 Application Layer Functions

9.5.4.1 Function Code

Table 9- 2 Function Code

Function Code Function


0 (0x00) Confirm
1 (0x01) Read
2 (0x02) Write
3 (0x03) Select
4 (0x04) Operate
5 (0x05) Direct Operate
6 (0x06) Direct Operate No Acknowledgment
13 (0x0D) Cold Restart
14 (0x0E) Warm Restart
20 (0x14) Enable Unsolicited Responses
21 (0x15) Disable Unsolicited Responses
22 (0x16) Assign Class
23 (0x17) Delay Measurement

240 PRS-778
Communication Protocol

9.5.4.2 Communication Table Configuration

This relay now supports 3 Ethernet clients and 2 serial port clients. Each client can be set the DNP
related communication parameters respectively and be selected the user-defined communication
table.

The user can configure the user-defined communication table through the PRS IED Studio
configuration tool auxiliary software. The object groups “Binary Input”, “Binary Output”, “Analog
Input” and “Analog Output” can be configured according to the practical engineering demand.

9.5.4.3 Analog Input and Output Configuration

To the analog inputs, the attributes “deadband” and “factor” of each analog input can be configured
independently. To the analog outputs, only the attribute “factor” of each analog output needs to be
configured. If the integer mode is adopted for the data formats of analog values (to “Analog Input”,
“Object Variation” is 1, 2 and 3; to “Analog Output”, “Object Variation” is 1 and 2.), the analog
values will be multiplied by the “factor” respectively to ensure their accuracy. And if the float mode
is adopted for the data formats of analog values, the actual float analog values will be sent directly.

The judgment method of the analog input change is as below: Calculate the difference between
the current new value and the stored history value and make the difference value multiply by the
“factor”, then compare the result with the “deadband” value. If the result is greater than the
“deadband” value, then an event message of corresponding analog input change will be created.
In normal communication process, the master can online read or modify a “deadband” value by
reading or modifying the variation in “Group34”.

9.5.4.4 Binary Output Configuration

The remote control signals, logic links and external extended output commands can be configured
into the “Binary Output” group.

To an extended output command, if a selected command is controlled remotely, this command


point will output a high ~ level pulse. The pulse width can be decided by the “On ~ time” in the
related “Binary Command” which is from the DNP3.0 master. If the “On ~ time” is set as “0”, the
default pulse width is 500ms.

9.5.4.5 Class Configuration

If the DNP3.0 master calls the Class0 data, this relay will transmit all actual values of the “Analog
Input”, “Binary Input” and “Analog Output”. The classes of the “Analog Input” and “Binary Input”
can be defined by modifying relevant settings. In communication process, the DNP3.0 master can
online modify the class of an “Analog Input” or a “Binary Input” through “Function Code 22” (Assign
Class).

PRS-778 241
Communication Protocol

9.6 IEEE 1588-2008 Protocol


9.6.1 Overview
The Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is a protocol used to synchronize clocks throughout LAN. On a
local area network, it achieves clock accuracy in the sub-microsecond range, making it suitable for
measurement and control systems.

9.6.2 Time Synchronization


Time synchronization of the device support IEEE 1588-2008 Protocol via ethernet interface or
optical interface.

242 PRS-778
Commissioning

10 Commissioning

10.1 General
This part contains a brief description about how to verify the function, including functional
verification items, functional verification methods and more.

With high degree of self-checking, any fault with the internal hardware and software can be
diagnosed by the device itself. So for the commissioning, only hardware interface and the
application-specific software function are necessary to verify.

Before carrying out commissioning, users should pay close attention to the safety, technical data
and the ratings on the front panel label.

10.2 Safety Instructions


This section contains some safety information, some of which are given warning signs to avoid
personal injury or equipment damage, to prompt the user to be careful.

10.2.1 Safety Identification

Electrical warning icon indicating a danger of electric shock.

Notice icon, indicating important information or warnings involved in the article. This icon
may indicate a danger of software, equipment or property damage.

Information icons alert readers to important facts or conditions.

Prompt staff not to forget the dangers of static electricity and make prevention.

Forbid to energize the device while not grounded, to avoid endangering the personal
safety due to electrical insulation damage!
Although these markings warn of the danger, it is important to note that operating damaged
equipment under certain operating conditions can result in reduced process performance and may
result in death or personal injury. Therefore, be sure to fully comply with all warnings and cautions.

10.2.2 Safety Identification Examples


For the various safety instructions given in the previous section, the following are examples

10.2.2.1 Warning Signs

PRS-778 243
Commissioning

Do not touch the circuit during operation. There may be fatal voltage and current.
Strict compliance with safety regulations. Work in high voltage environment need to be
serious to avoid personal injury or equipment damage.
When measuring signals in an open circuit, remember to use a properly isolated test clamp
that can have fatal voltages and currents.
During normal operation, never disconnect or connect the wires or connectors connected
with the terminals. It may cause deadly dangerous voltage and current, may also interrupt
the operation of the equipment, damage the terminals and the measuring circuit.
Never disconnect the secondary winding of the current transformer. Current transformers
that operate when the secondary windings are open will create strong potentials that may
damage the transformers and may cause personal injury.
When the protective device is energized, never plug the module. Hot plug may damage the
protection device and measuring circuit, may also result in injury.

10.2.2.2 Caution Signs

Do not connect the protective shell to the live wire, charging the shell may damage the internal
circuit.
During installation and commissioning, be careful not to get an electric shock if you touch
the leads and connecting terminals

10.2.2.3 Notice Signs

Do not modify the settings in the running protection device. After modify the setting, verify
it according to the rules.

10.2.2.4 Anti-static Signs

Remember to avoid touching circuits, including electronic circuits, and the device may be
damaged if subjected to static electricity. Electronic circuits may also contain deadly high
voltages.
Remember to use a certified conductive bag when transporting the module. Remember
to connect the anti-static wristband to the ground when handling the module and
remember to operate it on a suitable anti-static surface. Static electricity discharge may
cause damage to the module.
Remember to wear the anti-static wristband connected to the ground when replace the
module, Static electricity discharge may damage the module and protection device.

10.2.2.5 Earthing Signs

Regardless of operating conditions, remember to connect the protective device to the


earth, also needed for special occasions such as testing, demonstrating and off-line
configuration on the desk. Operation of the protective device without proper earthing may
damage the protective device and the measuring circuit and may also cause an injuring accident.

244 PRS-778
Commissioning

10.2.2.6 Information Signs

Effective value and step of settings explanation: The protection setting supports as much
as 6 significant figures, of which the decimal point occupies one digit (the highest digit
can not be a decimal point). The minimum setting step is 0.01.

10.3 Commission Tools


10.3.1 Instrumentation and Meters Notice:
 Instruments, meters must pass the inspection, and within the validity of the inspection

 instruments, meters should be accurate level higher than the seized equipment related
indicators 2 to 4 levels.

10.3.2 Tools Requirement:


 Relay protection testing devices: Multifunctional dynamic current and voltage injection test set
with interval timer.

 Regulative DC power: DC output can be adjustable within 0 ~ 240V.

 Accuracy meter: support three-phase voltage, three-phase current output.

 Tong-type ammeter

 Multifunction phase meter

 Multimeter

 Megger

 Laptop: with appropriate software

 Network cable

 Optical power meter

 EIA RS-485 to EIA RS-232 converter

10.4 Commission Preparation


10.4.1 Basic Knowledge
When commissioning this device for the first time, sufficient time should be allowed to become
familiar with the manual to understand the basic operation, protection principles, and related basic
performance of the devices as much as possible. If find any doubt in the process, consult the
manufacturer's field service personnel or technical support staff of our company.

Alternatively, if a laptop is available together with suitable setting software (such as PRS IED
Studio software), the menu can be viewed one page at a time to display a full column of data and
text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved to a file on disk for
future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to the PRS IED Studio Instruction

PRS-778 245
Commissioning

manual for details.

If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to commissioning, it is
advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow them restoration later. This could be done
by extracting the settings from the relay itself via printer or manually creating a setting record.

10.4.2 Operation Preparation


Check the printer wiring is normal, the print paper is ample, in order to print the test settings,
version, and a variety of experiment data.

Attention! The device should be checked before power on. The appearance should be no
damage. The module is plugged and fastened, and the insulation of the DC voltage circuit
meets the specified requirements. The indicators can refer to the commissioning record of the
device.
Attention! Disconnect the external AC circuit of the cubicle before the test to avoid
causing a safety accident, which will cause serious damage to the construction workers on
site.

Attention! When you need to plug and unplug the device module, you should ensure the
device is powered off and make the anti-static measures to prevent the module damage or
performance degradation.

Attention! Temporarily open or shorted terminals should be well documented for reliable
recovery after the end of the test.

If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the protection in order to
perform any of the following tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in
accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram. Confirm current and voltage
transformer wiring.

10.5 Product Checks


These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to ensure that it has
not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning correctly and all input quantity
measurements are within the stated tolerances.

10.5.1 Document Check


Document acceptance check include: protection inspection and factory test reports, certificates,
drawings, technical manual of related equipment.

10.5.2 Appearance Inspection


Check the the front and back of the cubicle of various electricalcomponents, terminal blocks,
hard-switch. All should be marked with the number, name, application and operating position. The
marked handwriting should be clear, neat, and not easy to bleach.

The device mark inspection shall include the product type, name, manufacturer's name and
trademark, date of manufacture and serial number, safety mark, etc., the mark and installation
location shall be consistent with the design drawings.

246 PRS-778
Commissioning

Inspect the surface of the device. There shall not be scratches, bumps, groove marks, rust,
deformation and other defects that affect the quality and appearance;

Check the device panel keyboard is complete, flexible operation, the LCD is clear, the indicator
shows normal;

Uncharged metal part of the device should be connected as one, and reliable grounding;

Check the cubicle shell of the device must be grounded reliably;

10.5.3 Insulation Check


Disconnect the weakelectric link with other devices and short circuit the AC voltage circuit terminal,
AC current circuit terminal, DC circuit terminal and signal circuit terminal inside the cubicle
terminal block, and measure the insulation resistance value using the tester whose open circuit
voltage is 500V. Insulation should meet the following requirements:

Device independent circuit and exposed conductive parts, 500V megger insulation resistance
measured value should be no less than 100MΩ;

Between electrically disconnected independent circuits, 500V megger insulation resistance


measured value should be no less than 100MΩ;

After the insulation test is completed, make sure that all external wiring is properly connected.

10.5.4 External Wiring Check


External protection wiring should be consistent with the design drawings; Internal and external
wiring on the terminal block and cable marking on it is correct, complete, and consistent with the
drawings; Secondary circuit wiring should be neat and beautiful, solid and reliable;

All secondary cables and terminal blocks wiring connection should be solid. Cable mark should be
complete, correct and clear;

The correct mark should be attached to the optical fiber (including optical cable, pigtail, jumper)
and both ends of the device port. Such fiber-optic annotation should include the optical fiber
number, destination. The starting point of the fiber should indicate the cubicle number. The
content of the port mark should include the port number and destination. The starting point of the
port should include the cubicle number, switch number and port number.

10.5.5 Test Category


The following tests are necessary to ensure the normal operation of the equipment before it is first
put into service.

These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware defect.
Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by self-monitoring when the
power supply is energized.

• User interfaces test

• Binary input circuits and output circuits test

PRS-778 247
Commissioning

• AC input circuits test

• Function tests

These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests of the
protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.

• Measuring elements test

• Timers test

• Metering and recording test

• Conjunctive tests

The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other external
equipment.

• On load test.

• Phase sequence check and polarity check.

10.6 With the Relay Energized


Check that the input range of the external power supply should meet the power requirements of
the "technical data" section within the permissible power supply input voltage range.

Attention! All external circuits connected to the unit must be checked to ensure correct
installation before the unit is powered on or the test procedure started.

10.6.1 LCD Display Check


After the device is powered on, the LCD will be lit. After the device is initialized, if the device is in
normal operation, the LCD displays the status of the main single line diagram.

Attention! If the device is in the alarm state after power-on, the LCD displays the alarm
status information. At this point you can refer to the "Supervision" section to analyze the
cause of the alarm and treatment.

10.6.2 Date and Time


If the time and date is not being maintained by substation automation system, the date and time
should be set manually.

Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using menu item “Clock”.

For devices using IRIG-B (DC) time code and SNTP, IEEE 1588 time synchronization, you can
verify the timing accuracy by modifying the clock setting of the device. For PPM, PPS time
synchronization system, through the time synchronization binary input check.

10.6.3 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)


The device has two lights that can not be defined. the two lights are as follows:

"Healthy": indicates that the device is in normal operation, no software, hardware failure. When the

248 PRS-778
Commissioning

"healthy" light goes out, it indicates a serious problem with the device, resulting in the device not
functioning properly.

"Alarm": indicates that there are some alarm events on the device. On this condition, you can
analyze the cause of the alarm and how to handle it by checking the "supervision" section of the
manual.

The rest of the indicators are configurable indicators.

If the indicator of the device is set to the self-retaining state, if the signal is not reset before the
latest power-off, the signal will continue to be triggered when the device is powered on again, and
the indicator can be reset by resetting operation. It is likely that alarms related to voltage
transformer supervision will not reset at this stage.

10.6.3.1 Test the HEALTHY and ALARM LEDs

Apply the rated power supply and check that the “HEALTHY” LED is lighting in green. We need to
emphasize that the “HEALTHY” LED is always lighting in operation course except that this device
finds serious errors in it.

Produce one of the abnormal conditions listed in Chapter 4, the “ALARM” LED will light in yellow.
When abnormal condition reset, the “ALARM” LED extinguishes.

10.6.3.2 Test the Other LEDs

Test the other LEDs according to the configuration of the LEDs (through the PRS IED Studio
software). If the conditions which can turn on the selected LED are satisfied, the selected LED will
be on.

10.6.4 Test the AC Current Circuit


Attention! The wiring must be checked in strict accordance with the AC current connection
drawings provided.

The purpose of this test is to check whether the wiring of the AC circuit in the cubicle is correct
and whether the sampling precision meets the requirements. The sampling accuracy and polarity
of the device can be checked throughsourcing rated AC current at the AC current input terminal on
the back of the cubicle .

Protection current measurement accuracy requirement shall be no higher than 1% or 0.02In.


However an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being
used.

Apply current equal to the current transformer secondary winding rating to each
currenttransformer input in turn, see the following table, checking the magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.

Table 10.6- 1 Current channel checkout

Group No. Item Input Value Input Angle Display Value Display Angle
Three-phase current 1 la

PRS-778 249
Commissioning

Group No. Item Input Value Input Angle Display Value Display Angle
lb
Ic
la
Three-phase current 2 lb
Ic
la
Three-phase current … lb
Ic
Residual current 1 3I0
Residual current 2 3I0
Residual current … 3I0

10.6.5 Test the AC Voltage Inputs


Attention! The wiring must be checked in strict accordance with the AC voltage connection
drawings provided.

The purpose of this test is to check whether the wiring of the AC voltage in the cubicle is correct
and whether the sampling precision meets the requirements. The sampling accuracy and polarity
of the device can be checked throughsourcing rated AC voltage at the AC voltage input terminal
on the back of the cubicle .

Protection voltage measurement accuracy requirement shall be no higher than 1% or


0.02UnHowever an additional allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment
being used.

Apply voltage equal to the voltage transformer secondary winding rating to each
voltagetransformer input in turn, see the following table, checking the magnitude using a
multimeter/test set readout. The corresponding reading can then be checked in the relays menu.

Table 10.6- 2 Voltage channel checkout

Group No. Item Input Value Input Angle Display Value Display Angle
Ua
Three-phase voltage 1 Ub
Uc
Ua
Three-phase voltage 2 Ub
Uc
Ua
Three-phase voltage … Ub
Uc
Residual voltage 1 3U0
Residual voltage 2 3U0
Residual voltage … 3U0

250 PRS-778
Commissioning

10.6.6 Test the Binary Inputs


The purpose of this test is to check whether the connection of binary input circuit is correct. During
the test, the voltage applied to the binary input terminal must be within the allowable operating
range.

Each binary input status can be checked by the device LCD panel, and the status "1" indicates
that the binary input has been applied with an input voltage, and the opening status becomes "0"
when the input voltage disappears.

Table 10.6- 3 Binary inputs checkout

Teminal N0. Signal Name States on LCD Correct?

10.6.7 Test the Binary Onputs


The purpose of this test is to check whether the binary output circuit connection is correct.
According to the protection logic of the device and various kinds of signal output logic, stimulate a
fault condition. The corresponding relay contact of the device shall be operated with the
corresponding action or alarm signal.

10.6.8 Protection Function Checks


The purpose of this experiment is to verify the correctness of the protection logic. Protection
function tests generally include the following types:

• Impedance protection test

• Current protection test

• Voltage protection test

• Frequence protection test

• Secondary system supervision function test

For details on how to implement the protection logic function, refer to "Operation Theory"

10.6.9 Printing Function Checks


Check the printer cable is connected properly before printing, printing paper is complete. Printing
method can be set to "automatic" or "manual". When set to automatic printing, the device will print
protection action event, self- checking information and other records initiatively in real time.

10.6.10 On-load Checks


The objectives of the on-load checks are:

• Confirm the external wiring to the current and voltage inputs is correct.

PRS-778 251
Commissioning

• Measure the magnitude of on-load current and voltage (if applicable).

• Check the polarity of each current transformer.

10.6.11 Final Checks


After the above tests are completed, remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. Restore the
original correct wiring. Tighten the secondary circuit terminals, especially for the current terminals,
circuit breaker closing and opening, operating power supply circuit.

If a test block is installed, remove the test plug and replace the cover so that the protection is put
into service.

Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records and alarms have been cleared
and LED’s has been reset before leaving the protection.

Ensure that the protection has been restored to service.

252 PRS-778
Installation

11 Installation

11.1 General
Design and installation chapterissuitfor design, installation, commissioning and maintenance
staff.Designers must have a wealth of experience in electrical design.The installer must have the
basic knowledge of electronic equipment and cubicledrawingreading.Commissioning and
maintenance personnel must have extensive experience in operatingprotective equipment and
test equipment.The equipment must be shipped, stored and installed with the greatest care.

Choose the place of installation such that the communication interface and the controls on the
front of the device are easily accessible.

Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the requirements regarding place of
installation and ambient conditions given in this instruction manual.

Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the equipment and terminated correctly
and pay special attention to grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines contained in
this section.

11.2 Safety Instructions


Warning!Onlyinsert or withdraw a module while the device power supply is switched off. To
this end, disconnect the power supply cable that connects with the power supply module.

Attention! A module can only be inserted in the reserved slot. Components can be
damaged or destroyed by inserting module in a wrong slot.

The basic precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge are as follows:

 Should boards have to be removed from this relay installed in a grounded cubicle in an HV
switchgear installation, please discharge yourself by touching station ground (the cubicle)
beforehand.

 Only hold electronic boards at the edges, taking care not to touch the components.

 Only works on boards that have been removed from the cubicle on a workbench designed for
electronic equipment and wear a grounded wristband.

 Always store and ship the electronic boards in their original packing. Place electronic parts in
electrostatic screened packing materials.

11.3 Checking the Shipment


Vehicles, trains, ships and all other means of transport are available, but to prevent snow and rain,
shock, impact and collision, to ensure product packaging integrity.

Check that the consignment is complete immediately upon receipt. Notify the nearest CYG

PRS-778 253
Installation

SUNRI CO., LTD. Company or agent, should departures from the delivery note, the shipping
papers or the order be found.

Visually inspect all the material when unpacking it. When there is evidence of transport damage,
lodge a claim immediately in writing with the last carrier and notify the nearest CYG SUNRI CO.,
LTD.Company or agent.

 Unpacking and checking procedures

1. Remove the shipping package.

2. Before unpacking, you should first check the equipment packaging intact, whether there are
signs of serious collision and phenomenonsthat equipment in the box may be damaged. If
found abnormal, it is recommended to take pictures as a record, confirm and contact with the
manufacturerat first time.

3. When unpacking, you should use a claw, and pull out the nails, and then pry off the box lid; If
the crowbar is used, never take the device as a fulcrum, and it is forbidden to stick into the
wooden box carelessly with the crowbar.Open the box with the greatest care and avoid
excessive vibration.

4. Check the appearance of the device is intact.

5. Check the delivery list.Check the device certificate of competency, supporting documents,
attachments, spare parts, etc. are consistent with the order requirements, whether the packing
list and the type, name, quantity, etc. are consistent and complete. If correct, sign the
confirmation.

6. Manufacturerdocuments and spare parts should be assigned to personal keeping and


registration.

7. If any abnormalities occur during unpacking, feedback CYG SUNRI CO., LTD. Company or
agent at the first time, so as to avoid the follow-up of unclear responsibilities.

If the equipment is not going to be installed and commissioned immediately, store all the parts in
their original packing in a clean dry place and keep air circulation.And to prevent the intrusion of
various harmful gases, non-corrosive items stored in the same place.

11.4 Material and Tools Required


The necessary mounting kits will be provided, including screws, pincers and assembly
instructions.

A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles to the floor using the plugs
provided (if this relay is mounted in cubicles).

11.5 Device Location and Ambient Conditions


The mechanical and electrical environmental conditions at the installation site must comply with
the requirements of "Chapter 2 Technical Data". Avoid adverse conditions caused by the
environment:

254 PRS-778
Installation

 Avoid installing in wet, dark and other places likely to cause damp and rust. If in unavoidable
rainy area, install the device in a higher position;

 If the area is an earthquake prone area, fix the protection devicetightly;

 If there is a lot of dust in the installation place, clean it before installing.

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to front of the device, i.e. to the
human machine interface of the equipment.There should also be free access at the rear of the
equipment for additions and replacement of electronic boards.

11.6 Mechanical Installation


In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles on the foundations that have
been prepared. Take care while doing so not to jam or otherwise damage any of the cables that
have already been installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations.

The device should be firmly fixed inthe cubicle(cabinet),and the connecting screws should be
tightened.The grounding wire of each device shouldbeconnected with the copper grounding
busbar inside the cubicle, and reliably connected with the secondary grounding network. Device
wiring should be consistent with the wiring diagram requirements.

The devicefeatures a 6Uheight, 1/1 19 "or 1/2 19" widthchassis, integral paneland pluggable
functional modules with lock. The device is designedconformingto IEC 60297-3.Embedded
Installation as a whole, rear wiring. The current/ voltage connector structure are in the same size,
and can be expanded, combined flexibly. Installation hole size as below.

Attention! It is necessary to leave enough space top and bottom of the cut-out in the cubicle
for heat emission of this relay.

PRS-778 255
Installation

256 PRS-778
Installation

Figure 11.6- 1 Dimensions of this relay and the cut-out in the cubicle (unit: mm)

11.7 Electrical Installation and Wiring


11.7.1 TACircuit Connection
According to the wiring diagram of the device, connect the terminalblockofrearAC modulewith the
CT loop usingmultiple wires, of whichthe cross-sectional area should be 2.5 ~ 4.0mm2.

11.7.2 Power Supply, VT, BI and BO, Signal Wiring


According to the wiring diagram of the device, connect the AC, Phoenix terminal of module and the
terminal blockin the cubiclesidewith multiple wires.

DC voltage power supply wiring power +, power - should be distinguish indifferent colors,
forexample power + (brown), power - (blue).

Power supply, binary inputs & outputs: stranded conductor, 1.0mm2 ~ 2.5mm2.

AC voltage inputs: stranded conductor, 1.5mm2.

Grounding: braided copper cable, 2.5mm2 ~ 6.0mm2.

For wiresconnected to two points, there should be no jointin the middle, and the
wirecoreshould not be damaged. If the wire length is not enough during the process of
wiring or rewiring, the worker must replace it. There should be no excess wire in the slot. If it is
required to remove the wire, the whole wire must be completely removed.

PRS-778 257
Installation

When wiringtheACterminalofmodule, current and voltage wiresmust adopt


12mmsizecablelug, to avoid loosecontact.Strictly prohibit electric screwdriver, so as to
avoid terminals damage.

Attention! Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this
equipment to be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will
produce a dangerously high voltage.

11.7.3 Grounding
Use a yellow-green multi-core cable with a cross-section of at least 2.5 mm2 to connect the
grounded copper bars. The cubicleshouldreliably connected to the secondary ground network.

11.7.4 Shielded cable connection


When using a shielded cable, connect the shielded cable to ground and follow the engineering
application method. This includes checking of the appropriate grounding point near the device,
such as the grounding point inside the cubicleand the grounding point near the measurement
source. Ensure a single shield connection a suitable short cross-sectional wire (maximum 10CM)
for ground connection.

11.7.5 Install the optical cable


Care should be taken to handle the cable without substantial bending. The minimum curvature
radius of the plastic optical fiber is 15 cm and the glass optical fiber is 25 cm. To use the cable
clamp, a loose buffer sleeve should be used.

When connecting or removing the optical fiber,pleasetake hold of the connection ends. Do
not take the cable. Do not twist, stretch, bend the cable. Invisible damage can increase the
attenuation of the fiber and can destroy the communication.

11.7.6 Install the communication cable


When using electrical connections between the protection device and the communication device,
or point-to-point electrical connections between the two protection devices, it is important toinstall
the cables carefully. Due to the low electrical level of communication signals, the factors

258 PRS-778
Installation

susceptible to noise interference must be considered.

The best way is to use shielded twisted pair(STP), one for each twisted pair and the other for the
all twisted pairs for surround shielding. Each signal uses the twisted pair shown in the following
figure to shield each individual twisted-pair cable by connecting its internal shielded cable to the
device's ground connection or, alternatively, to a device near the signal transmitter Connected, at
the receiving end, shielded line let it hang in the air, not connected with the ground. The outer
shield surrounding all twisted pairs is physically connected near each end of the equipment.

Cc: communication cable

Lc: lineconnector

Rx: receive signal input

Tx: transmitsignaloutput

Sc: shielded (grounding) connection

11.8 Installationcheck
11.8.1 Checktheinstallation
Check that all terminal screws with external wiring are tightened, the wiring is neat, and all wiring
labels are clearly defined.

11.8.2 Confirm the hardware and software version


Hardware and software version information is available on thedevice label. After the device is
powered on, the software version can also be checkedthrough the LCD interface.

11.8.3 Devicestart
ifconfirm that the wiring is correct duringthe installation check, you can supplydevicewith power
andstartit.

PRS-778 259
Installation

Configuration file needs to read during device startup process.Itneeds a certain period of timefor
the startup process.The startup time is relatedtothe size ofconfiguration file. In general, the startup
time is less than 1 minute.

The "HEALTHY" indicator lights up when the unit starts up normally. If a fault is detected during the
startup procedure, the "ALARM" indicator is lit and the internal fault code, alarm information can
be checked via LEDs.

260 PRS-778
Maintenance

12 Maintenance

12.1 Maintenance General


A strict and detailed laboratory test is carried out in the development and design of the relay device.
All the relay devices are strictly tested according to national or international standards.

The relay device has powerful real-time self-check capability. However, during the long time
running of the relay device, there is no real time supervision for the input terminals and output
circuits. Therefore, some periodic tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning
correctly and the external wiring is intact.

The maintenance of the relay device mainly includes the following two conditions:

 Regular testing;
 Failure maintenance

12.2 Regular Testing


Regular testing is to test the normal relay devices in a certain period of time, so as to find potential
defects or failures and eliminate hidden dangers to ensure the healthy operation of the devices.

The regular testing cycle depends on a number of factors, such as the environment conditions, the
complexity, etc. Advices of CYG are as the following:

 The relay device must be tested for the first time in the first year of operation, mainly including
protection logic, AC circuit, tripping circuit and power supply circuit.

 A partial test should be carried out every 3 years, mainly including the inspection of the AC
circuit and the tripping circuit.

 An overall test should be carried out every 6 year, mainly including the protection function
logic, the AC circuit, the tripping and closing circuit, the power supply circuit.

12.3 Failure Maintenance


Failure maintenance refers to the maintenance of a faulty relay device.

12.3.1 Hardware Failure


1) Check whether the hardware is in trouble or not according to the device alarm signal.
2) visual check of the device
 Check whether the device has obvious physical fault
 If you can find a clear physical fault point of the device, please contact CYG for repair or
replacement
3) Confirm the scope of the fault
 Check whether this fault is caused by an external circuit.
 Carry out the input and output test for the relay device by test instrument.

PRS-778 261
Maintenance

 If it is determined that the fault belongs to the relay device, please contact CYG for repair
or replacement

12.3.2 Software Failure


1) Check whether the hardware is in trouble or not according to the device alarm signal.
2) Try to restart the device and check if the fault is recoverable if possible.
3) If the fault is not recoverable, please contact CYG for repair or replacement

12.4 Replace Failed Modules


If the failure is identified to be in the relay module and the user has spare modules, the user can
replace the failed modulesto recover the protection device.

Repair at the site should be limited to module replacement. Maintenance at the component level is
not recommended.

Before replacement, the user should check that the replacement module has an identical module
name and hardware type-form as theremoved module. Furthermore, the replaced module should
have the same software version. For the replaced analog input module and power supply module,
it should be confirmed of the same ratings.

NOTICE!

After replacing modules, it must be checked that the same configuration is set before
and after the replacement. If it is not the case, there is a danger of the unintended
operation of switchgear taking place or of relay device not runningcorrectly. Persons
may also be in danger.

Units and modules must only be replaced while the power supply is switched off and
only by appropriately trained and qualified personnel. Strictly observe the basic
precautions to guard against electrostatic discharge.

Take anti-static measures such as wearing an earthed wrist band and placing modules
on an earthed conductive mat when handling a module. Otherwise, the electronic
components may suffer damage. After replacing the main CPU module, check the
settings and configurations.

262 PRS-778
Decommissioning and Disposal

13 Decommissioning and Disposal

13.1 Decommissioning
13.1.1 Switching off
To switch off this relay, break down the cable connected to the power supply module or switch off
the external miniature circuit breaker.

13.1.2 Disconnecting cables


Disconnect the cables in accordance with the rules and recommendations made by relational
department.

DANGER!

Before disconnecting the power supply cables that connected with the power supply
module of this relay, make sure that the external miniature circuit breaker of the power
supply is switched off.

DANGER!

To decline the possibilityofelectricalshock, allcurrent terminal should be shorted before


attempting to remove or replace any modules.

13.1.3 Dismantling
The rack of this relay may be removed from the system cubicle, after which the cubicles may also
be removed.

DANGER!

When the station is in operation, make sure that there is an adequate safety distance to
other operating parts or equipments, especially as dismantling is often performed by
unskilled personnel.

13.2 Disposal
In every country there are companies specialized in the proper disposal of electronic waste.

NOTICE!

Each module used in thedeviceisfixedto several specific module type, as oftenly


indicated with a label on the backside of the chassis. There are some chances that the
modules will be damaged if they are installed in the wrong chassis slot. When removing
and replacing modules, it is best to use the label in the chassis as a indicator, so as to
make sure each module is installed in the proper slot.

PRS-778 263
Decommissioning and Disposal

NOTICE!

Strictly observe all local and national regulations when disposing of the device.

PRS-778 265
Manual Version History

14 Manual Version History


In the current version of the instruction manual, several descriptions on existing features have
been modified.

Table 14- 1Manual version and modification history records

Manual Version Software


Date Description of change
Source New Version
Beta 1.00 1.00 2014-04-15 Form the original manual.
Update the number of the binary inputs and binary
outputs..
Add the binary input hardware demo diagrams in the
1.00 1.01 1.01 2015-05-21
binary input tables.
Update the description of IEC61850 dual-MMS
Ethernet.
Add parameters of fault location function.
1.01 1.02 1.02 2016-01-24 Output TEMP_RL is added Internal improvements.
Update the configurable signals.
Update the communication description.
Update the mechanical specifications.
1.02 1.03 1.10 2016-08-16
Update the main CPU module picture.
Update the setting list.
Update all the protection functions.
Add the “4.2 Supervision Alarm and Block” chapter
Increase the amount of the terminal of BI module.
1.03 2.01 1.20 2017-12-16 Update the logic diagram of the Three-phase
thermal overload protection.
Update the content of the “9 Communication
Protocol” chapter.
Update the description of the protection functions.
2.01 2.02 2.00 2018-06-09
Update the IDMT curves.
Modify thedrop-off to pickup ratio to 97%
2.03 2.03 2.03 2018-08-21
Add GPS time synchronization IEEE 1588
2.03 2.03 2.03 2018-09-21 Add chapter 9.6

PRS-778 267

You might also like